Home

MagLog User`s Manual

1. 87 14 9439410 30 19 757 9580 yry 10 38 57 RT yo 10 39 27 B93 Ol S vaman Ay aera 10 40 O1 NI Se ener Va TO Oe ee ae om User fl REB A i a a 10 41 27 ser tiag OS i Be B j aas Flag name and 9 St Zi position are Hrm a 3 plotted 87 14 9801 170 30 19 8187890 10 41 57 r l J 87 15 0191310 40 19 80078 10 A 10 42 27 C 10 42 57 87 15 0261070 30 19 7634630 7 10 42 57 S a f 10 43 27 87 15 0273040 30 19 7246080 a gt i mag nT W 5 00 50 00 maglO nT W 500 00 0 43 57 signal R 500 00 500 00 2500 00 slot 1 used to plot magnetic field in wrapped scale the left slot 2 plot depth in fixed scale 0 15m max value on Maglog print page example 125 slot 3 plot signal in fixed scale 500 2500 max vlaue on the right Top area legends 4 92nT hh a g Lon sep 29s lag all MagLog printer legends and annotations Typical legend for trace plot Horizontal bar 1 cm length and number above indicate scale how many nT in 1 cm Printed trace name is assigned by the user Typical legend for mark plot used for GPS event marks depth marks etc Icon on the left
2. ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecs 144 10 1 CONFIGURING SLOTS TRACES FOR PRINTER cccescescscescescescescescescescescescencs 147 10 2 CONFIGURING OUTPUT DEVICES cccescescescscescescescescescescescescescescescescescencs 150 10 2 1 Configuring the Video Titler Airborne Applications cccccccceeeeeseees 150 10 2 2 Configuring Direct Printer Printrex and Dot Matrix printers 151 10 3 CHANGING LINE NUMBER DURING SURVEY ccceccecescesceccecesceccscescescecescscsens 155 1L THE SURVEY eccerre eaa EEAO eaat 156 11 1 THE MAIN SCREE NN ose e cubase A A N oO 156 V2 TAE MENU ea me OD CE Oe OT ORE ne Ce OOO OTR CoE Ce Re aS 158 12 READY TO START LOGGING DATA esesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesssesesesssesesesese 159 12 1 AUTO LOGGING FEATURE cccesceccecescesceccscsceccscescescecescescscescescecescescesescescuceecs 159 MS SURVEY UNITS horaaaectch erase i veceincocdssctiebavescacdoberedeusiosdeccadetosebavecdsstabexacevilon dassabenees 161 14 REAL TIME CABLE LENGTH ADJUSTMENT ERROR BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED I5 OUILIPUT OB Ds Sennen neice veri btn re rn eee Se ena RS eee 162 16 DEPTH ANALOG CHANNEL CALIBRATITON ccccccecccccccccccecs 163 16 1 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE cc xc ee baer ales E be So teee Ses seed b ec des Sota oeuekowes 163 16 2 AUTOMATIC DEPTH ANALOG CHANNEL CALIBRATION cccecceceecesceccecesceceecs 164 16 3 WEA NAT AIT RN TON a a a a AE IAN 166 16 4 EFFECT
3. typically marked in blue on the keyboard 101 e Pan East West North and South Pans GPS view in coordinal directions Note that this might interfere with automatic scrolling if the latter is enabled GPS position is never scrolled out of view if auto scrolling is on A simple click in the middle of the GPS window will center it at that point auto scroll should be off to make this feature function properly When mouse cursor 1s moved to borders of the GPS display it will change its shape to at the East border at the South border at the West border and t at the North border When the cursor in moved in the corners of GPS display it changes its shape to Pab a and If the cursor has changed its shape using a mouse click causes panning in the direction shown NB This could interfere with the auto scrolling feature 6 3 Preparing a Survey plan file MagLog allows you to overlay GPS information on a map that consists of polylines and optionally of the survey area polygon Each string has pair of numbers latitude and longitude of the segment s node An empty string indicates the end of the polyline segment the next string shows the start of the next line Here is an example Siw FI BIZCU00 1Lz22 245900000 Label text Shaft I BIZ6000 Lzz72 24 7750000 Ste Too 2Z60000 1L272 254600000 3fe463156000 121 96835 70000 ST 401059000 121 9752 71000 Here first polyline has 2 linear segments and second polyline has
4. M Use Internal UTM I Geographical output Ellipsoid parameters Ellipsoid name Major asis metera Flattering UTM projection parameters Central meridian degrees Scale factor 0 9666 for UTM jo 3336 Northing meters Easting meters Here Use Internal UTM is specified because the output of the GPS is in latitude and longitude coordinates The UTM specific parameters must be filled out correctly and Northing and Easting remain at 0 we ignore the offsets here Geographical Output box specifies that the all coordinates should be output in a latitude longitude format Entering the correct value for the Central Meridian is crucial If this value is not correct the Interpolator will not work and you will see a warning message on start up Please use UTM zones table and your current position to find appropriate Central Meridian value or have you GPS connected during wizard set up so that the program will automatically detect your position and set the proper Central Meridian 4 Positions Dialog There are two sensor positions that should be calculated here The positions are filled out as follows The first sensor position is specified as below Set parameters for mag 1 es Type Shifted Distance m 20 Azimuth degree 270 Cancel Here we are using the shifted point a point behind the tow point that in this case refers to the cente
5. The CTM 10 has 5 internal counters that can be used to count external pulses Normally these pulses come from vehicle s wheels or odometer speedometer Counting does not involve the main CPU unit and does not produce an additional IRQ overhead During each polling interval MagLog reads the current counter s value and writes the counter value I2 and ratio time interval number of events into the log file This last value can be transformed into speed 1f the proper scale factor is used It is not recommended to use the polling interval with less then on pulse every 100 ms because this can produce an additional load on the CPU slowing graphics and logging functions 5 20 Generic Serial triggered devices Full version of MagLog program can handle devices which require trigger to produce serial output Some of these devices need ASCII trigger string and produce ASCII output some require binary trigger string and produce binary output Mixed cases are also can be handled All types of these devices are handled by Generic Serial Triggered device Here we show how to use Generic Serial Triggered device using A D converter from DGH corporation http www dghcorp com DGH1141 and direction sensor from MicroStrain http www microstrain com inclinometers aspx 3DM GX1 as examples Both devices must be configured prior to 8 bit no parity 1 stop bit prior to connection to PC Please see product manuals for configuration procedures T
6. This will bring up a dialog box that will allow you to set a minimum and maximum allowed value This is particularly important when you calibrate your altimeter 165 because occasionally you might get a spiked reading missed echo that you don t want included in the calculation of your average After you have at least two points MagLog will then try to calculate a scale factor and bias You need to make sure that you have at least two different depth points e g it is advised to have one point near the surface and the second point as close to the bottom as possible Otherwise the calibrations will not be accurate It is advised to add more than two points to get improved accuracy You should also select Channel Represents Depth This option is important if you have an ORE device If you are satisfied with the calibration select OK 4 You will then be given the opportunity to save your calibrations into a file The file will keep track of the scale and bias calculated and the readings used to make the calculation It 1s advised to keep this for your records 16 3 Manual Calibration Manual calibration gives you the opportunity to enter the scale and bias directly without having MagLog calculate them for you Typically these values are included along with the marine magnetometers often listed on a sticker found on the fin assembly If the depth channel is already properly calibrated this dialog box also provides
7. 099 052 0795 35705 835 0212 14259 646 0916 124667 346 024 Eounter is Pere eee rere reer rer rrr errr errr 100351 238 0244 412604550190 12299949 8955 12977 914 01 90316 032 0200 392501750190 12299 8469955 12928 675 024 82105 484 0215 37571 381 0190 12299 949 99593 12844 409 027 Counter 3 i Eoen Poo 72669 072 0299 34292 92 0229 12299 948 8970 12536 538 021 67256 690 0186 32934 700 0225 12299 945 9019 12469 669 027 A002 Counter 5 i 63221 280 0242 31597 603 01 78 12299 848 9016 12392 267 022 60210 698 0256 30507 733 0203 12299 846 8950 03787 422 018 59001 121 0247 29397 309 0222 12295 848 0950 1 7 3065 407 015 5 fl Iv Stop data window update Estimated data rate Hz 10 2 Eounter 5 Configuration Send Successfully Send Configuration Send Reset Som _Store configuration Firmware AS ooo AS max channels 6 The program will attempt to communicate with the magnetometer using the default communications port If you get a message such as the one seen above Could not open COM11 this means that MagLog is unable to read any data coming in on the specified communications port The following steps should allow you to systematically correct the error and get your device working 1 2 Set the communications port and baud rate Complete the entries in the boxes labeled Por and New Baud Rate After you have specified these you should then press Send Configuratio
8. BINARY DGH1141 produces just ASCII strings so select ASCH TEXT Trigger type Choices are ASCII TEXT or HEX CODES Select ASCII TEXT Trigger string Type trigger string as it 1s required by the device see device manual for details For DGH1141 it is just 1RD to acquire simple reading other trigger strings are also possible Trigger termination character decimal In most cases it would be or Line Feed 10 or Cartridge Return 13 DGH1141 uses cartridge return Trigger sample interval ms This sets time interval for triggers Trigger syne mode To prevent jamming the device you could require that no trigger could be issued if PC in the reception of the data from the device This only could be a case if high sample rate is used 74 Data string length This is buffer size to be used to accommodate one string of device data In fact in case of ASCII data any number big enough like 1000 would be sufficient This would be however critical parameter in case of binary data see below Data termination character In most cases it s 10 or 13 DGH 1141 requires 13 Note that if you change it for existing device you need to re start survey for changes to take effect Max number of fields to parse How many channels you might have in the data string The parsing rules are exactly the same as for Generic Serial Device device any non numeric character is considered as field terminator Load and Save buttons
9. CONTINUING AN EXISTING SURVEY orian E A AEE 9 4 CONFIGURING INPUT DEVICES AND DISPLAYS WITH MAGLOG WIARDA 10 Al STARTING MAGLOG WIZARD uenea a a a wallabies 10 42 CONFIGURING GPS ANDITS DISPLAY norr te eion NTE ETTR 2 4 3 CONFIGURING MAGNETOMETER OR EM PULSE 12 HARDWARE sssseeceeeeeeeees 15 4 4 MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION ccccsssccssccscccscccsccsscesscesscesscesccescesscesseesscesscessees 18 A REALTIME LAY BACK CALCULATIONS caer ia T a a a Ta aT 19 46 DATA DISPLAY CONFIGURATION ernn EE O AE 22 4 7 CONFIGURING DOT MATRIX OR PRINTREX PRINTERS FOR OTHER PRINTER MODELS SPENE XD SECTION cciasstd aisceiccuuicstenai Gea tie e O vase ETO A A a i 24 4 8 CONFIGURING SYSTEM WIDE WINDOWS PRINTER ccccseccsscesscesscesccesscesceescencs 25 ARES Mame HONEST SH A Gc ZU TU eme a MWD cRen NAT een C nna Mn ery Me etter 26 5 MANUAL CONFIGURATION OF INPUT DEVICES ccsscccssccssccceees 21 5 1 CONFIGURING SERIAL PORT OR TCP IP CONNECTION PARAMETERS eseceeeseeee 29 5 2 USING ONE SERIAL OR TCP IP PORT TO RECORD MULTIPLE DEVICES 00ee0000 33 5 3 CONFIGURING THE G 880 MAGNETOMETER ccccssccssccscccsccesccescescesscesccesseessees 34 5 3 1 Configuring the magnetometer cerstetisrnesina ea iiaa 34 5 3 2 Configuring MagLog or MagLogLite to recognize incoming data 38 524 CONFIGURING Hb OP Scie tities Hie tica ie cation es cae a aa atlanta es 41 5 5 CONFIGURING SERIAL EVENT
10. Completely removes graphic entity previously selected in the list above Edit Allows user to adjust properties of the graphic entity selected in the list Remove All Removes all graphics from the slot makes it empty Move to slot Allows user to move the graphic entity from one slot to another when multiple slots are used For instance if the user wants to move flags originally plotted in slot 2 on top of the depth to slot 1 to be plotted on top of the magnetic field he or she can do it by selecting the entity then the move to slot and pressing the Move button Duplicate Duplicates currently selected graphical entity A typical example would be plotting the same data in two different scales First configure one plot and then duplicate it Then adjust scale and color for the copy trace Press Add button to add a new graphical entity A small dialog Add graph to the slot will appear To add the magnetic field select Trace This means that a waterfall graph is being added to the slot The next section describes in detail how to add a magnetic field waterfall graph 9 3 4 1 Adding magnetic field plot to the slot Continue as in previous section press Add button and select Trace Trace definition dialog appears 132 Configure Trace Basic Trace name rmag Data units nT Trace type Single channel Device alias MAG Device channel mag Formula Ad
11. Configure printer button to Printer parameters Ayallable layouts 1 880 mag depthlfeet with interpolator Configure printer Back Cancel Typically one or more layouts are available To use this feature check Use windows printer box and select the appropriate layout Then press Configure printer button This displays a standard printer selection dialog box Select one of the printers available for your system and hit Ok button 4 9 Finishing setup After the Finish button on the final screen is clicked not shown here MagLog will attempt to set up the survey as it was configured You should have your GPS and magnetometer connected and transmitting data at this time If you don t have real inputs coming into the serial ports MagLog will still create a survey but you won t be able to run it If you are running an unregistered version of the program or do not have a registration Dongle Key which plugs into the printer port to enable full access to program MagLog will switch data inputs from serial port input to data file input demo mode MagLog creates two windows a magnetometer display window and a GPS view window and tiles them on the screen The GPS window initially has the minimum possible magnification so you are able to see whole earth globe Make this window active with the mouse by clicking once on it and then use and keys to set desirable magni
12. Data to display formula 1 MAGi all Clear Bias Add terms to the data Formula Scale i Channel GFS Lon Display parameters Display update interval ma 100 MW Check data in the range tor 30 Use audio alarm Advanced Appearance Annotation Altimeter Units m Digits before dot 3 Test color E Background Bi Digits after dot BE Erorcolor l Sample ddd d m Format decimals To initialize the window you must construct a formula which can be as simple as a single data field 1 e depth Use fields Bias Scale Channel as appropriate and then click the button Add to make a new formula If you make a mistake remove the formula using the Clear button For example if you have boat fathometer running as the first channel of the Generic Serial device with the name gen select the channel as gen 1 and press Add The new term will appear in the Data to display formula field Now to subtract the magnetometer depth set the Scale to 1 and Channel to MAG depth device names can be different in your survey Press Add button again Now you have a formula to compute and display 3 Fill in other fields as appropriate When you cross the border of the parent window you need to release the left mouse button and press it again to gain control of the window positioning 116 e Displ
13. and max values must be entered If the reading is below the min value the program plots 113 3 circles with the negative color If the reading is above the max value the program plots circle with the positive color o Min and Max values These are the limits for an Amplitude plot in absolute mode o Positive and Negative colors Positive areas of the Amplitude Plot are plotted with the positive color negative areas are plotted with the negative color 4 Value plot The following parameters are required for the Value plot O O O O Data step to plot value If the absolute difference between the last plotted value and the current data value exceeds this limit the new value is plotted on the track Distance to plot value If the distance between the last point where a value was plotted and the current point exceeds this limit the current data value is plotted For example if you want to plot a value each 100 m enter 100 and enter an unrealistic step in Data step to plot value This will effectively disable plotting by value Conversely if you enter very large value for Distance to plot value for example 100000m and set the Data step to plot value to 1 a value will be plotted each time the data changes by more than the latter might be useful to place event marks on the GPS track Value digits after dots This setting
14. and you should see the following screen 880 Settings OF Alias Device Name aan Cancel Enable Disable Channels Signal sth RMS Field range min max Sensor 1 fw ooo ooon froo000 ooo Gib range Sensors setup Cc LLLLLUM Sensor 2 wt Sensor _ Sensor 4 m Sensor 5 Sensor 6 _ Sensor Sensor a _ 0 vob hh AM Data format Analog channel calibration setup Sensor fi Channel intemal Manuel calibration Auto calibratam 5 3 2 Configuring MagLog or MagLogLite to recognize incoming data We previously used MagLog to inform the Magnetometer what data we wanted sent to the surface Now we can make selections about how MagLog will interpret the incoming data flow First specify the number of channels you expect to see as per the previous magnetometer setup and label the device name for in survey reference You can also set pre set limits on the values of the analog and digital channels that will generate warning messages visual and verbal or auditory external speakers recommended if values go out of range This is very useful in a noisy environment where you cannot watch the screen at all times Types of errors which generate verbal and visual warning flags might be a loss 38 of data transmission a bad GPS fix sensor going too deep or sensor too close to the bottom To specify an alias for your device the name that will appear on all wind
15. button the field can be moved into the Selected output fields list Only fields in the output list are transmitted Each field from the available field list can be represented only once in the output list Add gt gt Selecting field on the left and pressing Add button displays the following dialog 186 Configure output field E x Internal name MAG Output name MAGI Format Digits after dot 7 Cancel Here the user can specify how to output a selected field It is possible to re assign the output field name for example MAG1 could be replaced by mag and the output format The following selections are available in the format field Original Decimal Degrees minutes minutes Degrees minutes seconds If original is selected field is sent out the same way it is saved in the Interpolator log file Decimal and other selections allows re formatting of the field value before transmission using the Digits after dot value Edit this button changes the output attributes for the field already selected for output It displays the same dialog as Add button for field selected in the output list Remove field Removes currently selected field from the output list Include field names in the output Output field names are transmitted along with field values 1f this box is checked Add checksum to the output Each output string can be appended by star sign and checks
16. changing one changes all Annotation font OF Cancel Here is you can define the graphical parameters such as slot orientation background and border colors and annotation font Here you can also define e Auto center time Because the magnetic field is wrapped when it is plotted it is possible that much of the graph will be plotted near the slot borders or continuously wrapping and unwrapping In other words the central field value value assigned to the center of the slot may not match to the actual field valut To avoid this the program can re adjust the central field value every so many minutes as selected by the user Enter this time interval here Note that when this feature is used the field graph can jump from time to time when the central field value is adjusted e Use same time scale for all slots From time to time you may need to change the slot duration For instance if original slot duration was 60 seconds and you want to increase it to 120 seconds you need to do this for all defined slots which could be laborious if many slots are defined Checking this button means that if the duration of any slot is changed then the durations of all other slots are adjusted automatically to match new time interval e Equalize slots button allows you to assign all slots equal sizes You may use this button if some slots are lost as result of interactive slot manipulation see Slot size adjustment below
17. 6 Cancel Cancel the setup without keeping any changes 7 Ok Stores changes and saves layout in the file If no filename was selected in which to store the layout then a default file name is used 127 Next press Print setup and select the appropriate printer along with the paper format and orientation Press the Properties button to select the appropriate paper Note how the Print Preview page on the screen changes when another paper or orientation is selected The next step is to set the page duration and attributes such as time grid interval margins line styles etc Right click on the white page and select Configure page The following dialog appears Configure printer page x Main End print time 25 02 PM Date 4 21 2007 Layout name Total page duration mirt 2 Time grid interval sec fio All ines START STOF 09 00 48 01 03 07 Z Set page number E At the start At the end Colors and styles Outline coo Test color he Grid color RE be Grid line style i Draw Geometrics Logo Line width mm fo M Use uniform pen widths Uniform line width mm o s Margins Lett margin cr 2 5 Right margin cri 2 fi Bottom margin cm 0 5 Top margin cm blin shot width cm 0 1 ea The most crucial settings listed are Total page duration in minutes and Time grid interval in seconds The other settings can be left with default values A co
18. 94 Note An easy way to change slot display parameters 1s by right clicking on the screen to call up the contextual menu Then select Display item It will bring you immediately into the slot configuration dialog box You can configure the display in the same way for other devices 6 1 4 Horizontal Slots and Slot Legend The graphic below is an example of horizontal slots mode often preferred to maximize the use of available screen area Mags 50s 35117 35629 35139 35641 OT S ee s eee CN AA NV ANAE O RAA A ee Sigs 50s 500 1500 500 1500 fix 1000 000 a oT The labels mags and sigs are names of the slots The total duration of the slot 50s is computed in the following manner Values in are current limits for green and blue traces When the trace wraps its limits are altered automatically to show the current slot scale On the far right side is slot s vertical scale If slot has a fixed scale the key word fix is present This means that the traces for this slot cannot wrap lt eee ee Vertical slots have the same legend if space permits If not only the slot s name is displayed 6 1 5 Slot context menu When the user right clicks on the slot window the context menu shown below will appear Set GPS Flag Set FISH Flag List flags Display All slots Slot MAG oom In oom Out 95 6 1 6 Set GPS Flag and Set FISH flag allow the user to set flags on the anomalies at
19. IM Use depth for lavback Altimiter Magnetometer 2 Scale li Bias lo Back Cancel This section 1s not available for the proton G 877 866 magnetometers or for the EM Pulse 12 G 877 has its depth sensor internally calibrated and EM Pulse 12 does not have a depth sensor If you have one of these devices you can skip to the next section If your hardware includes depth or altimeter sensors they need to be calibrated The Wizard does not provide full calibration capabilities see below Depth Analog channel calibration how to do complete depth altimeter calibration however it does allow entering of the calibration coefficients if you know them These values might be obtained from the factory check marine sensor fin assembly for sticker with coefficients or as the result of previous calibration procedures If depth is to be used during real time layback calculations see below check box Use depth for layback This makes MagLog to use depth and cable length to compute distance from the boat to the fish You can check the Do not enter calibration coefficients now button and the scale will be set as 1 and bias as 0 Do this if you don t know the calibration coefficients at this time Note that this screen will not appear if you do not have depth or altimeter sensors in your system 18 4 5 Real time lay back calculations Real time lay back Magog has a feature called Interpalator which allows you to c
20. MagLog MagLogLite Data Acquisition Software 25479 01 Rev N lers Guide GEOMETRICS INC 2190 Fortune Drive San Jose Ca 95131 USA Phone 408 954 0522 Fax 408 954 0902 il MagLog MagLogLite software Installation and Registration Procedure This program is the newest version of our standard MagLog or MagLogLite logging package It now includes a Configuration Wizard that will step the user through set up of the G 877 G 881 and G 880 Marine Magnetometer and G 823A or G 823B airborne basestation systems This software is in continual development so make sure you check our website regularly for the latest version For instance a features such as Survey Playback and Print on Anomaly enable high speed anomaly detection and location Important A software key Dongle or serial number copy protects these versions of MagLog and MagLogLite You must follow the procedure below in order to enable the version that you purchased either MagLog or MagLogLite 1 Install MagLog or MagLogLite by inserting disk 1 in the A drive and running SETUP Insert the other disks as required 2 After installation connect the software key dongle to any PC parallel port Start the MagLog program via desktop shortcut or via menu The program will ask you to enter your company name and user name You must answer these questions in order to register your software After you answer these questions the program
21. Shown below Interpolator params Mags l TAK UTM Positions Net M Use Internal UTM Geographical output Ellipsoid parameters Ellipsoid name wGS H4 1984 Major asis meters Flattening UTM projection parameters Central meridian degrees 45 Scale factor 0 9666 for UT M p 4456 Northing meters jo Easting meters jo The configurable options available are Use Internal UTM This should be enabled if the GPS outputs latitude longitude geographical coordinates and disabled if the GPS outputs UTM coordinates Geographical Output This controls the format of the output position coordinates It should be checked for geographical output latitude longitude and unchecked for UTM output If you want Lat Long output you must check both Geographical Output and Use Internal UTM Geographical output is currently unavailable for GPS input given in UTM coordinates Note UTM to Geographical transform will apply to all positions output and stored Aside This dialog is necessary because the program internally does all calculations in UTM coordinates These coordinates are more convenient and faster for doing positional calculations In order to do a conversion from geographical coordinates to UTM coordinates the Interpolator needs to approximate the earth as an ellipse with specified parameters Additionally there are several other positional dependent factors that you have to ente
22. add 1 su btract z1 depth bias 1686 depth decimals 4 input voltage scale factor i input voltage bias sign 0 add 1 subtract 0 input voltage bias O input voltage decimals 0 temperature scale factor 1 temperature bias sign 0 add l subtract 0 temperature bias O temperature decimals 0 polarize voltage scale factor 1 polarize voltage bias sign 0 add l subtract 0 polarize voltage bias O polarize voltage decimals 0 gt F Preamble field display position l l1st 2 2nd etc 1 field display format time display position 0 none 1l l1st 2 2nd etc O time display format Tid Grsplay positron 0 none J lstu 2Z 2nd 2 ee 4 0 fid display format Signal display position 0 none 1l l1st 2 2nd etc 2 Signal display format depth display position 0 none 1l l1st 2 2nd etc 3 depth display format input voltage display position 0 none 1 l1st 2 2nd etc input voltage display format temperature display position 0 none 1 1st 2 2nd etc 0 temperature display format polarize voltage display position 0O none 1 l1st 2 2nd etc polarize voltage display format tuning display position 0 none 1 l1st 2 2nd etc 0 tuning display format Status display position O none 1 I1st 2 2nd etc 0 Status display format Postamble N gt Checking Press Y to save to FLASH any othe
23. 202 18 High precision Land Airborne Marine surveys In the normal MagLog operational mode there are several sources of time inaccuracy latency that can lead to spatial errors in the location computation There are certain surveys where even slight inaccuracies in the position of the sensors cannot be tolerated such as those that have to do with locating Unexploded Ordnance UXO with military MTADS systems or high precision archeological surveys where small target search is the primary mission Geometrics has devised a proprietary methods of dealing with the internal electronic delays that occur in all computational equipment including GPS s and PC s Here we describe the problem and our solutions e The GPS receiver has its own internal delay due to the time to calculate position This value can vary between less than 10ms to 500ms This is known as LATENCY and depends on the GPS model A time stamp embedded in the GPS message corresponds to the location at the time it was calculated However the transmitted string 1s delayed due to the internal GPS CPU cycle time MagLog records the time when the GPS message becomes available to the computer or more exactly to the software thus there are a series of delays from the time of the actual position fix to the time that the information becomes available MagMap2000 processing software makes use of the PC time stamp to interpolate magnetometer position and thus ignores the delays MagMap still
24. 9 3 4 4 Adding flags to the plot Adding flags to the plot is very similar to adding GPS positions MagLog creates an internal device with alias Flags adding this device to the marks plotter makes flags appear A flag is plotted as a horizontal line across the slot with flag name plotted above the line and flag position below the line A flag icon is plotted on the line left of the text The printed position is the same as was selected when the flag was created The user can create flags at the GPS location GPS antenna or boat location magnetic fish location if MagLog Interpolator is configured or on the map directly The time the flag was created can be plotted instead of the position if desired To add flags to slot 2 move the mouse into its area and double click or go to context menu Traces Press button Add and select Marks to add Type marker name as flag or whatever and leave the units blank Select device alias as Flags and channel name flag Set appropriate sizes for the marker as well as text size t is important to check print all data Otherwise the program will miss flags Choose correct position units Close the dialog with the Ok button and close Data to draw dialog with Ok button too Now the flags will appear on the printout as soon as they are generated Flags generated in playback mode are not printed 9 3 4 5 Service functions in pr
25. Both option including base line Adding lines Single line or base line for multiple lines Start point longitude 87 24981889 Start point latitude 20 3263661 Add from flags End point longitude 87 24981889 End point latitude 3032638611 Add from flags Annotation Additional multiple survey lines W Create multiple lines parallel to base line Total lines 3 Separation m 100 Side from the base line Fight side looking from Start point to the End point Cancel Enter optional text annotation recommended for easy line recognition on the screen Annotation is used as a prefix to the line names which are 1 2 etc starting from left to right looking from start point of the line to the end point In this manner a preconfigured grid pattern for the survey can be established prior to acquiring data This can help the vessel stay on course but it is recommended that such features present in the GPS itself be used to actually steer the vessel Add Survey area Use this button to define a survey area Below is the procedure to define an area 1 Write down Longitude Latitude pairs for the boundary of the survey area in clockwise order Alternatively put map flags on the survey plan screen 106 and write their Ids identification names listed on screen or under Flag in Flag dialog box in clockwise order note that flags should be set before calling Add plan elements menu
26. Do not apply filter to the logged data box is checked the data is still saved to disk Light stays red but file size numbers show increasing size of the log file Note For a new list to take affect you must restart your survey Note If you don t want any filter select Reject only policy and leave the prefix list blank this is the default condition 5 2 Using one serial or TCP IP port to record multiple devices It is possible to attach more than one logical serial device to one physical serial port or TCP IP port The primary purpose of this feature is to allow mixed mode data streams data streams with multiple information sources included to have display for each of the included data sources For instance 1f the GPS and magnetometer data are mixed in the same data stream the MagLog GPS device and the MagLog 880 logical device can share the same physical port The software can open the data stream twice to log each part of the serial stream as a separate input thus allowing each device to have its own display window Proper prefix filtering in this case could be used to separate 880 and GPS data inside MagLog To share a serial port among multiple devices the following conditions must be met e Each device must have exactly the same baud rate e Each device must transmit in ASCII mode and use same string terminator Only one device 1s allowed to provide handshake or to talk back to the program For example fo
27. NOTE This GPS latency correction may be automatically applied to the interpolator file output computing interpolated positions and storing them real time 19 Playing existing surveys back playback feature 19 1 Viewing data with playback The latest MagLog versions have a new playback feature that allows replaying already acquired surveys to look for anomalies set automatic anomaly flags and to check data quality It is important in Playback Mode that the user keep the same sequence of data as was recorded during the original survey Simply reading data from the files does not ensure this because the reading operations are not synchronized between various data streams coming from the files you must use Playback Mode There is a secondary ability to read and display data from files Reading from Files Mode this is the manner in which we distribute the fully operational program in demo mode and this feature should be used only for training purposes not for data evaluation Use the new Playback Mode for proper synchronized review of your recorded data Due to nature of playback some features are not available in this mode including logging because these files are used as data sources On the other hand almost all MagLog features are available in the Reading from Files Mode which makes it more appropriate for training See section 15 2 below on Sample Files under Other Topics for more information on this feature Playback
28. The following dialog window is displayed when Set Flag is called Please enter flag name Flag time i 028703 10 33 07 204 Flag type GFS Device GFS ba position Channel ILon Device GPS f position Channel Lat z Cancel Here flag name is a mandatory field to be filled in by the user Flag time is the time of the mouse click The flag is assigned this time Flag type allows assigning different types and positions to the flag Possible choices are GPS FISH and MAP FISH type flags are available only if the MagLog Interpolator device is running computing fish position based on layback Selecting GPS or FISH reassigns X position and Y position fields to match GPS or magnetometer fish positions Selecting MAP simply changes the flag type without re assigning X and Y positions In this case the user can assign any values for X and Y positions by selecting Device and Channel manually for X and Y It is the user s responsibility to assign proper flag positions under these conditions Channels values to 4 are set to zero for flags set on the preview page List Flags This menu item calls up the user flag dialog box that lists all available flags Please see Using Flags for details Configure page Calls dialog for page configuration The same dialog 1s called if double clicked in a slot free area Center
29. cE Te oE 6E BE LE 9 GE PE EE lE TE oE 6 BE LE 9 GE PE EE lE TE oE 6 BE LE 9 GE PE EE ZE TE oE 6 SE LE 9 GE PE EE cE Te oE 6E BE LE 9 GE PE EE cE Te oE 6E BE BC BC BC a4 al BC ag g A SC 2 2 3 2 az g z g a4 z z z g ag z g 2 3 z z 4 z z z z 2 z z 2 z 2 z 2 a4 ag ag ag ag ag ag ag ag al e 2 ag ag ag EE EE EE EE EE EE cE cE cE cE cE LE cE cE cE cE Te Te TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 GE 6E GE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE LE LE Of oE oE O oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE eg eg eg eg eE PE eg PE PE EE eg eg eg eg Pe Pe eg eg eg et eg Re RE RE RE RE RE RE RE RE RE et PE egt eg RE egt et egt PE PE PE PE eg PE PE eg eg PE eg eg eg PE PE PE PE PE eg PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE Pe PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE CE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE
30. e0 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 29 29 39 29 29 39 a9 39 39 39 39 89 39 89 39 39 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 p9 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 BO qq qe 26 Ps L 39 3G OG TP cE eg EL FO G 93 LP g2 8q 62 e6 qg qL 29 PS P se Jz oz IT ZO J g PP go 9q ge L6 88 6L 69 eG qp 2 z PI 20 J3 OF 2 TP Zo cq Pe F6 Gs OL L9 EF EF EF EF J EJ EJ J J J J J J J Z3 fF c3 C3 cs cs C3 fF z3 cs c3 cs cs 3 c3 cs Z3 IJ IJ IJ TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TS OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF LL EL OL OL EL EL EL PL EL PL 6L PL EL IL PL EL PL EL GL BL ES 98 Ps 28 T8 PL L 28 28 Ts L PL 89 29 q9 e9 F9 Z9 3G 6S JG 3G aG 9 G9 P9 29 69 G9 9 JG JG BG 6G OS PP OS TS qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL aL GL GL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL qL oF oF eJ oJ 63 oF 63 3J 635 eJ q3 GF oF GF OF 63 3J 3J oF 3J oF PJ OF qy 0 oF eJ 6J 3J OF 3g PJ GF GF J PJ OF J PJ GF PJ TH J TS ja qs 63 PJ 00 J 33 T3 qa ea Da qa La Ga FF J3 FJ FJ J3 FF J3 FJ J3 FJ J3
31. eab Units meters gt Cable length channel iz eci Decimal 2 Port Settings Cancel Alias device name Assign alias device name here Units Units are as per the setup of the indicator device They can be meters feet or fathoms This selection does not affect log file but should be set properly for use by MagLog real time layback Interpolator Cable length channel Specifies device channel for cable length Parsing rules are the same as for Generic Serial Device Termination char Decimal value for string termination character 5 16 Configuring the G 858 magnetometer The Geometrics G 858 MagMapper is a hand held device used primarily for land magnetic surveys It has an option to output magnetometer data via its serial port and can be used in conjunction with MagLog acquisition software e Set up for the G 858 console Start a new survey as a Base station Choose Store mode as Transfer to PC only or Store amp Transfer to PC In the first case data will not be stored by the G 858 internally but only by the PC In the second case data will be stored both in the 858 and externally you can download the data set and 64 process it in the Magmap2000 program Of course you can also bring in MagLog and MagLogLite Survey files into MagLog2000 as well e Set up MagLog Go to Configure Input devices and select G S58 from the list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the next configuration dialog bo
32. instructions to MagLog to use the depth values in the real time position interpolation or simply to inform Maglog that the channel represents depth or altitude In manual calibration you can either determine the scale and bias values yourself or enter the bias and scale data supplied by Geometrics To use MagLog s manual calibration feature select Manual Calibration from your device settings menu Make sure that you have the correct sensor and channel selected as discussed in the section on Auto Calibration You will see a dialog box 166 Calibration for sensor 1 channel Depth x Linear calibration of analog channel Scale 0 047538 Bias 34 65 MW Channel represents depth alt Cancel Enter your scale and bias values and check Channel represents depth alt if this is a depth or altitude calibration This informs MagLog that this channel has distance units and is to be re computed when user changes units for the survey meters or feet If the user wants to use the depth reading in the real time position interpolation then the button use for layback calculations must be checked If multiple depth channels are used MagLog takes an average depth value to compute layback position When the 880 settings dialog box is closed MagLog reminds the user which channels are selected as depth channels for position interpolation 16 4 Effects of Depth calibration After you have calibrated y
33. m 1s replaced by f or vice versa The GPS window will change its grid units from meters and kilometers to feet and miles Magnetometer depth readings will also change units if channels are marked as depth for details see Manual Calibration 14 Real time cable length adjustment MagLog versions starting with 2 84 have the ability to adjust the magnetometer layback input without interrupting the survey This option is available via Output devices Layback menu The short cut key is F2 Layback can be changed regardless of logging status at any time Layback values also are saved into Interpolator log file and Line Number file In the latter case they can be used by the MagMap program to re interpolate the fish position in post processing mode It 1s assumed that cable length did not change while acquiring the data within the line but may change when logging is stopped in between lines The purpose of this is to allow winch operators to vary the cable length in real time due to varying depth conditions Automated cable payout indicators can be used to accomplish this also See section on payout indicators for more information on this facility 161 15 Output Files MagLog writes several files during the logging process All files are placed in the same directory where the survey file was created alitaining Survey SUAVE File a training Survey 800 mag MAG File a training Survey GPS gps GPS File a
34. no other client can concurrently connect to MagLog For instance using telnet a second time without closing first session will fail e Note that MagLog itself can be used as a client to re display Interpolator data A typical application would be to run MagLog on a remote computer and transmit the essential data via the TCP network to another instance of MagLog for display and QC control 184 When in client mode there must be a server set up and running on the network which will allow MagLog to connect to it A typical example of this is the use of a TCP to serial converter such as that produced by LanTronix In this case the user has to specify a server IP address When the recipient computer is in TCP Server mode the Status value changes to Connected If the user closes the survey with the client receiving data a pop up warning window is displayed Enable serial output This will enable output out of a communications port You can specify the output port and the baud rate The baud rate must be high enough to transmit the data at the specified sample rate of the magnetometer and accessories package Fora magnetometer sampling rate of 100 ms 10 Hz you should be able to transmit at least 2000 characters We recommend a baud rate of at least 38400 BAUD 17 3 Interpolator Output The Interpolator output dialog is called by selecting Output Devices Interpolator output menu item This allows the user to s
35. oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9E 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9E 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz FZ FZ FZ FZ FZ Jz Jz Jz FZ Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz Jz ZE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE CE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE
36. oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 JO OT 30 OT 30 JO OT 30 OT 30 30 OT JO OT 30 30 OT 30 OT 30 JO OT 30 OT 30 30 OT 30 OT 30 30 OT 30 OT 30 30 OT 30 OT 30 00 OT 30 oz JO JO OT JO oz JO 00 OI JO oz JO JO OT JO 6 PL p9 PS OP OF eg pz eT ZI LO p TP 92 pq oq 26 68 08 6L L9 9G ep f PZ OT JJ zJ 2p op aq Pe oe 2g dL 09 PS f z PZ ZI GO 83 Fe gs op qo 02 62 38 qh 69 LG s13 2 ST
37. 228 212 SAMPLE FILES READING FROM FILES MODE OR DEMO MODDBE 2 0008 228 21 3 OUTPUTTING STATUS INFORMATION FOR QC PURPOSES sscccceeeesseeeceeeeeeees 231 21 4 SETTING OPTIONS THROUGH SMAGLOGLINI ccceccececcecceccecesceccececcessecesceseces 234 21 5 MAGLOG PRINTER LAYOUT FILES cscccceccccecscececcecccececcscecesceceseececescecucees 236 21 6 CONFIGURING MARINE MAGNETOMETERS CM201CEG CONFIGURATION LDE PO ee ene Ee ea ECR RES SE ae Tae en A Se Re em et rere a 231 22 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 2 c ccccccscccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 238 22 1 WINDOWS NT INSTALLATION cceccececcececcccecccecccececcececescecscecesescecescecacees 238 22 2 INSTALLATION OF DIGI ADAPTER OPTIONAL ccccssssseeeccceceeeeeeseeecceeeeeeaes 242 22 3 INSTALLATION OF MAGLOG ccccceccececccceccccecccceccscececcscecescecescecessscesescecucees 243 22 4 INSTALLATION OF PRINTREX PRINTER OPTIONAL sssccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeaas 243 22 PULSE DRIVERS IN MAGLOG DISTRIBUTION cccececcececcsceccscecescecescecececcecucces 243 22 54 Windows NT oarecare ndare a a a E a E AE benuidicdasenncasiaetiiesiahketseuess 243 22052 Windows GO OS 5 ge 247 ZS MIN DD BX EEEE E EEA EAA EEA EE EEE E EE 248 1 Introduction This section describes general MagLog operating principles and will be useful for understanding the overall software and hardware architecture MagLog and
38. Company and User name below Company User IMPORTANT IF you have a dongle make sure itis connected NOII Have registration floppy onal Please enter your company and user name and then press the Ok button If you have purchased MagLog make sure that dongle is connected to the parallel port If you have re installed MagLog on the same computer where it was running before with a software key insert a previously created registration floppy in the A drive and press Have registration floppy button It is good practice to keep your future files separate from MagLog system files To assist in this task MagLog suggests creating of a new folder for these files By default this folder is located at C MagLogData however the user is free to change its location The following Browse For Folder dialog is displayed Browse For Folder Please select Folder to store Maglog survey Files Use Make new Folder button to create new Folder if needed or just press Ok to accept default lag temp C TEST_DIR Ii tmp 3 WINDOWS 3 WUT emp Sy wx168e a See HP_RECOWERY Dr Folder MagLogData Make New Folder The user can navigate and select the appropriate folder for survey file storage or use Make New Folder button to create new folder with a custom name Note On older systems Windows 95 or Windows NT this feature may not be fully functional After the Ok bu
39. DEVICE wcvonadesecssouasseunadeawvsdwsves sewedstwacoougeoesentebavedesbouss 42 5 6 CONFIGURING THE ORE TRACKPOINT II SONAR TRACKING DEVICE 0006 43 5 7 CONFIGURING THE GR 800 GAMMA RAY SPECTROMETER AIRBORNE cc00 44 5 8 CONFIGURING A GENERIC SERIAL DEVICE ccsccsseccsccescccsccesccessccesccesscescensceese 45 5 9 CONFIGURING THE RMS AADC AIRCRAFT COMPENSATOR csccseececcesceeceeceeees 47 5 10 CONFIGURING G 886 G 877 PROTON MAGNETOMETERS cscccssccessceesceeceeee 48 5 10 1 GOS CDI CGI OT OUI ON siissgiese tid aoa saan aac beanie aes o meee 53 SAO G20 77 Terminal Calbralon LOC aeiee N 58 5 11 CONFIGURING G 822A SUPER COUNTER DEVICE sccccscccsecccscccscccesceesscesesenscs 61 S22 cCONFIGURING EMG I DEVICE arrian aa a a 61 5 13 CONFIGURING EM61 MARK II DEVICE ccc ceecccsecceecccssccesccescccesccessceesceesscees 62 vi 5 14 CONFIGURING GYRO COMPASS DEVICE ccccccccccecececececececscscsesesesesecececsecceseeecs 63 5 15 CONFIGURE CABLE PAYOUT INDICATOR cnecienijcin ieron a a 64 5 16 CONFIGURING THE G 858 MAGNETOMETER sccccceceeseeeeenneeeeeeeeeeseeeenaeeeeeees 64 5417 GONFIGURING PUWILSE 12 EM DEVICE so sccecetsieee es devotes arhiets annete ee decoded 65 Sls CONFIGURE ECHO SOUNDER DE VICE ecirar aE anes 66 SIO TAT ZPUUSE DEVICES IN MAG GOG ceisir ai A 67 5 19 1 Configuring TTL event Mark device ccccccccccccecccccecccccccccccceseeeeeeea esas a
40. GYRO and three sensors This example has an ORE and a serial GYRO Gyro is not connected to the ORE but IS connected directly to the logging computer running MagLog The system components are a Serial GYRO b GPS c ORE d 3 sensors sensor one is 5 meters behind acoustic target sensor two is 10 meters behind acoustic target and sensor three is 20 meters behind the acoustic target The positions that we would like to compute and output are a Tow Point when a tow point is specified it is output instead of the GPS b Shifted Point position c Position of acoustic target d Sensor 1 e Sensor 2 f Sensor 3 The output is to be written to file and we would also like to do a real time Ethernet transfer of the data to another computer on the network Output specifications are UTM coordinates and the GPS outputs latitude and longitude coordinates 195 A graphic describing this configuration is shown below Y Xoffset ORE main amp hydrophone Tow point Y offset 10m Y offset 3 m Tow point X offset 2m LO Acoustic Traget 5m Sensor 1 5m o08 YUNWIZY Sensor 2 10m Sensor 3 196 1 Fill out Mags screen Interpolator params Mags TRK UTM Positions Net P Add remove interpolator device Array configuration Magnetometer array offset m Tow point GPS offsets M Use position of tow point instead of GPS Caution P
41. However let us say we are traveling in an ultralight aircraft at 60 mph 88ft sec Now 40ms latency will result in a 4 ft offset Latencies in Windows operating systems can be as much as 100ms and thus this becomes an effective tool to improve mapping and target location 227 21 Other Topics This section describes other topics not discussed above 21 1 Password Protection MagLog has a password feature that allows you to password protect your configuration settings If an incorrect password is given MagLog will block access to device configuration menus and the user will only be allowed to log data The password is initially specified after the first series of device configuration screens You will be asked for your password again if you exit and then re enter the program The password dialog appears below Password protection Enter password Cancel If you enter your password and press OK the program will attempt to verify your password If you press Cancel you will be allowed into the program but you will be unable to change any configuration screens The password is part of the hardware configuration and will be copied to the next survey if you start a new survey and decide to use a previous hardware configuration 21 2 Sample Files Reading from Files Mode or DEMO Mode This feature allows you to use a sample file instead of an incoming serial data string The program will act as if a real time da
42. Insert the Microsoft Windows NT 3 51 and 4 x Digi disk in your floppy drive Go to the Windows NT control panel a From your start menu select settings b Select Control Panel c Select Network 3 Select the Adapters tab You should already see your 3Com adapter selected If you 3 4 5 6 7 haven t installed networking refer to the Digi Software Manual for further instructions Otherwise select Add Click Have Disk and select A 1386 From the list of adapters shown select DigiAccelePort 8r 920 ISA Adapter The setup should then install the appropriate drivers You will be asked for an I O Base Port address and Memory Base Address If your jumper settings on the back of the card seen from the back of the computer match with the settings shown on the picture it is okay to use the defaults Otherwise refer to the DigiPort Manual Click OK on the next window to continue You need to restart your computer for the new settings to take effect 242 22 3 Installation of MagLog 1 2 3 4 5 Insert your MagLog installation disk into your CD Type a setup The MagLog installation will ask you the installation directory To keep the default C Program Files Geometrics press Next or press Browse to continue You also have the option to create a program group in your start menu Press Next to continue MagLog will then copy needed files to your hard disk You will need to restart your computer for
43. MagLog again and go to Help Register Insert the blank Registration Disk into drive A and then enter your Registration Number Press Ok to create your Registration Disk After the message Operation completed is observed you have registered MagLog or MagLogLite 7 Geometrics licenses this software for installation on one PC only You will have to repeat these steps every time that you install MagLog on a new PC The registration number is unique for each installation even if you reinstall on the same PC However if you created the Registration Disk you may use it to re install on the same PC without contacting Geometrics To do so press Have Registration Floppy instead entering the company name and user name Completion of the above procedure enables full operation of the version of software you purchased either MagLog or MagLogLite Quick Start Survey Configuration Connect the GPS and Magnetometer or Gradiometer 2 concatenated magnetometers to the communication port on the computer Start MagLog To begin configuration click on File in the menu bar and then on Survey Wizard The program will ask some basic questions about the marine system you are using type of magnetometer GPS antenna to tow point offsets tow cable lengths and give an explanation of the setup procedure When you have completed the wizard the software will begin displaying the data in analog chart format on the computer screen Begin logging
44. MagLogLite are essentially the same program except that the full featured MagLog is used primarily in multi sensor array multi instrument geophysical survey applications airborne land or marine MagLog supports various external third party instruments MagLogLite is designed primarily for the small marine magnetometer gradiometer data logging market and can be used for land marine single or dual sensor arrays used in wide mag archeological or UXO type surveys MagLog is a general purpose data logger that provides logging to disk and display of the following types of information e Serial data streams which comply with RS 232 specifications MagLog assumes that there are 8 bits of information no parity 1 stop bit and no hardware flow control ASCII data 1s preferable but binary data also 1s accepted Not all serial to USB or PCMCIA converters will work with all geophysical equipment Contact the factory for names of models known to work e Hardware generated pulses Typically this is a TTL 5 volt pulse arriving at the computer parallel port from an external device MagLog fixes the time of the pulse arrival and writes this time into the log file Examples of such hardware pulse devices are various event markers GPS PPS pulse per second output and trigger pulses used to start other devices e g air guns The recommended width of such a pulse should be greater than ms e Analog inputs This requires a special A D converter c
45. Note Check Plot Flag ID box in User Flags dialog box to see the flags on the survey plan 2 Press Add survey area button The following dialog is displayed x Define survey area Sume area paints MAP_ 1 30 32765891 07 2521 7666 MAP H2 30 32985052 07 252191 33 MAP 3 30 329951 08 OF 2456 F325 MAP He 30 32745740 OF 245650 FS Format Add Remove Edit Note points in this dialog define area where logging can be automatically started when boat or magnetometer enters the area Cancel Populate this dialog by pressing the Add button and entering the coordinate pairs as shown here Add point to the survey area x Longitude 87 2521 r666 Latitude 30 32765851 Name MAP t Format Decimal degrees r Ok Lancel Note that you can type a position directly using decimal degrees degrees and minutes or degrees minutes and seconds as selected in the Format field of the Define survey area dialog or press the Add from flags button and add positions of the existing flag 107 3 Inspect your entered positions You can remove or edit area points by using the appropriate buttons However keep the survey area corners in the right order 4 Press Ok to accept the survey area Note that the Survey map elements list will not show the survey area boundary coordinates However upon pressing the Add survey area button a second ti
46. SERIAL DRIVER cccececececeececescececes 205 18 2 1 Accurate time stamping with COMM DRYV drivet 205 18 2 2 Installing run time COMM DRYV environment o on 206 18 2 3 Using COMM DRV within MagLog software eeesaaa0aaannnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 209 18 2 4 Using GPSPCI card to synchronize MagLog time with UTC 000 213 19 PLAYING EXISTING SURVEYS BACK PLAYBACK FEATURE 215 19 1 VIEWING DATA WITH PLAYBACK cceccscecccceccccececceccccececcececescecescecesescecescecucees 215 19 2 POSITION INTERPOLATION WITH PLAYBACK AND INTERPOLATOR 2 ERROR BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED 20 SURVEYOCCHECKS oarece eea tone NPE E EES IRVIN PME Any oR SPEC 222 20 1 LAYBACK AND LATENCY TEST USING A NATURAL IN FIELD SOURCE 227 20 2 CONDUCTING LABORATORY LATENCY TESTS FOR MAGNETOMETER DATA FNC OISTIION SYS IEM ve ceadecemsionsstelasaacceaucaassencoandewamscinsdsaactuncdanieasauncannde seamasdsekomasseewasaests 224 ZOLA Hardware VOU WIL CCD cise Ast et aaa aia A ae 224 DOD ASD asta ates ay tet Matahs nates ete eens eten sie ena i Matas nare hy tleneentea arc eeer eel Naa 224 20 2 3 OPE LENG ete aa Ren eee ae ere tte eT he een eae Nera tne Deere 225 20 2 4 ANANS IE eR AT A ee ee eo eee eee ee eee 226 21 OTHER TOPICS sesciccssceesteaseseteessaveieteseriicevdecatiadeteseascavectaseneicennauasiiadateieesseveaeiese 228 21 1 PASSWORD PROTECTION 5 sccccx er cansh sac hivekcorsivcnat nesses ee sasue ene a a a Taea
47. Settings E4 Alias Device Mame Max string length OK tis 2000 Cancel Termination char Fis field position Asc Decimal Port Settings Alias device name User enters the device name Max string length Set buffer size to accommodate any possible string coming out of your device In many cases 2000 will work just fine but you should change this value if your device generates particularly long strings 42 Fix field position Numerical field number where fix is located In the above example it would be 1 because the fix is the first number in the string Here is how MagLog parses an ASCII string 11111822222s33333s44444s55555s66666 lt LF gt We have used a symbolic format for clarity here 11111 66666 represents numerical fields and s represents a separator that can be any character that is not in the following numerical valid character string Ee and De refer to exponential notation 0123456789 EeDet To display a value 11111 as a fix you should refer to it as 1 and to display value 66666 refer to it as 6 Count numerical fields from left to right using separators Termination char This is the last character of the string In the case of ASCII strings it is normally ASCII 10 LF or Line Feed If a Serial Event Mark device is present it will be inserted in the log files of other devices MagLog records the current fix value before recording the date and time
48. a blue Windows NT screen appear when the computer begins to load from the disk Alternately use your CD installation disk that came with your computer for complete recovery process 2 When prompted insert Setup disk 2 in your floppy drive You should see the computer load additional files for a while A gray status bar at the bottom of the screen shows pertinent events 1 You will be asked whether you want to repair a Windows NT installation or install a new version of Windows NT If your installation is severely damaged you will probably want to completely re install Windows NT 238 Warning depending upon the extent of your new installation you may need to reinstall all of your programs and drivers Make sure you have good backups of all data before continuing 4 To re install Windows NT press ENTER 5 Insert Setup disk 3 when prompted 6 You should next see a screen that will give you the option of auto detecting your devices This will attempt to find CD ROM drivers hard drive drivers and other applicable devices Press ENTER to let Windows NT attempt to automatically detect your devices Note In rare cases NT will not be able to detect your devices In these cases you will need to manually select your devices which will involve going through the installation procedure again The devices that it should automatically detect are a IDE ATAPI PCI Controller b Adaptec AHA 294X AHA 394X AIC78XX SCSI controller
49. a depth transducer calibrated at the factory and normally needs no calibration However if the user has altered the factory settings or simply wants to provide more accurate depth estimation the MagLog calibration procedure can be used NOTE Regardless of units selected for the survey feet or meters depth is always calibrated in meters The G 877 device stores all settings inside the magnetometer non volatile memory and the user can permanently save calibration settings in this flash memory The values are permanent and will not be lost after power 1s removed The G 877 has a sophisticated user interface accessible via a terminal program such as MS Windows Hyper Terminal This allows the user to make G 877 software changes employing standard Windows software However an inexperienced computer user may find using the terminal emulation mode difficult and therefore MagLog includes an easy to use interactive menu dialog to compute and store depth calibration parameters Here are general steps performed by MagLog to calibrate the G 877 depth sensor Find depth channel in G 877 data stream or enable it if it is not enabled Set format appropriate for calibration Reset internal G 877 depth scaling and bias to their initial values scale 1 bias 0 Start magnetometer Have user deploy and level the G 877 at different depths and take readings 5 Calculate calibration coefficients based on several data points collected by the user 6
50. all bytes must be set It is recommended to use 0 as a special header value This value should not appear in any other data For 0 header 1s 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x80 Note that the IBMPC uses LITTLE ENDIAN format and therefore the sign bit is set in the last byte 232 e Status data to output list This is core of the dialog Use Add Modify and Remove buttons to populate the list Pressing Add or Modify calls Add device to status output dialog box below Add device to status output Device name MAG Please enter channels separated by space Channels fi 23 Please enter format string below Format zi elf Zeh Cancel For each device the following information is needed e Device name the same as on MagLog light bar e Channels to output in a space separated list For example GPS device has the following channels 1 Lon 2 Lat 3 QC 4 SV Status list for this device may look like this 124 The program will output Lon Lat and SV Order in the list is irrelevant e Output format For ASCII mode this is simply C language format for N double precision values Only one format specifier is used lf For example format string GPS Lat 21f Lon 21f will produce output like GPS Lat 30 02 Lon 122 78 The program checks for proper format before accepting it In general N channels should match to N n lf codes Here n is number of digits after the dot In binary m
51. all disks from your computer It will automatically reboot 17 When prompted insert your Windows NT Workstation CD and press OK 18 The next screen should give you an overview of the different parts of the setup process To continue press Next 19 Select the type of installation you prefer You can always add new features later when needed If you prefer to customize your installation you can go into custom and manually select the features you need The following assumes you select typical 20 Enter a name and organization 21 The next screen will ask for the Product ID number This is found on the certificate of authenticity which is located on the top page of your Windows NT Workstation manual 22 You can then enter a computer name and on the following screen a password 23 You will then be given the option to create a repair disk This can also be done later using an RDISK utility when you want to save a lot of program settings as well 24 The next screen gives you the option of installing components New components can be installed later from the control panel After selecting you enter the Windows NT Networking by pressing Next 240 25 The default configuration for this computer is This computer will participate on a network gt Wired to the network This is true if you have a network adapter card such as the 3Com Ethernet card sold with the computer 26 Press Start Search to start searching for your ne
52. allowed value is 0 1 cm The slot width can only be allocated in multiples of the minimum width For instance if minimum width is 1 cm then any slot can have width of 1 2 3 etc cm but not 1 2 cm Line width is used to draw all page lines including text in device units Value 0 corresponds to minimal line width for the printer On high resolution printers 600 dpi or more such a line is very thin In this case increase the line width to 1 or 2 or decrease printer resolution in the printer setup Use uniform pen widths For some high resolution laser printers the default line width could be too thin for visible output Using this option allows increasing line widths for all elements of the page layout at once Uniform line width mm Specify here a desirable line width The recommended value is 0 1 or 0 2 mm Note that this overwrites individual line widths for the traces see below 9 3 2 Setting up slots to draw the data automatically In the next section see below we describe how to configure the print layout manually Manual configuration gives the user full control over the page layout However is can be challenging for the inexperienced user To assist in this task an automatic configuration feature is provided Automatic configuration is available from the print preview window via menu Page Auto configure When this item is selected the program erases the current page layout if any and creates a new layout based on what is
53. applying it to one or more slots There are also shortcuts for centering the traces for a specified slot or all slots in a window GPS Display Settings This menu has options for independently changing the scales of X and Y or changing them together In addition you can disable the auto scroll feature that automatically shifts the grid coordinates of the map when the GPS North icon moves off the current graph Window You can use this menu to arrange your current windows neatly within your MagLog program Some options that are available Cascade This will overlap the windows You can select a window by clicking on its title bar Tile vertically horizontally This will show all display windows in MagLog simultaneously It will divide the desktop area by the number of windows and attempt to arrange them appropriately There is also a list of most recently used windows kept here If you select one it will become the active window 158 Help This displays the current version of MagLog 12 Ready to start logging data When you are ready to log data select Start Logging from the file menu Note that the logging status indicator on the right side of the status bar changes its color from red to green J GPS A HAG A INT 3 03 Kb 3 60 Kb 12 08 Kb to green GPS MAG INT 7 58 Kb 8 24 Kb 26 88 Kb In between survey lines the turns select Stop Logging then Start Logging when you are ready This will
54. button is pressed the following choices appear What to print Curent page only All available pages C Last li pages C Print lines Cancel First three choices are the same as for real time surveys For instance the user could position the page to the place of interest and print only one page He or she can adjust page duration and scales for each anomaly The last choice Print lines enables selective line printing When the last choice is selected the following dialog box is displayed before actual printing starts 143 Select lines to print Print all lines Line 0 START Oe 2221 057 15 03 STOF 09 34 10 05 15 03 Line 1 START 09 43 27 057 15 03 STOP 10 07 22 057 15 03 Line 2 START 14 45 44 05 15 03 STOP 15 06 39 05 15 03 Cancel User should select desired lines to print Multiple selections can be made The program starts printing immediately after the Ok button is pressed All pages are spooled into one print job in real time continuous or on flag printing each page is spooled into separate print job 10 Configuring Other Devices 10 1 Re transmitting log information Starting with v 3 27 MagLog provides for re transmission of the log file content in real time For each input device it is possible to send a raw unaltered device string and PC time stamp the precise content of the log file Transmission can take place regardless of whether MagLog is logging data or no
55. by clicking on File and then Start Logging This manual is for both MagLog and MagLogLite MagLog and MagLogLite are essentially the same program except that the full featured MagLog is used primarily in multi sensor array multi instrument geophysical survey applications airborne land or marine The MagLog program supports various external third party instruments MagLogLite is designed primarily for the small marine magnetometer gradiometer data logging market and can be used for land marine dual sensor arrays in archeological or UXO type surveys Almost all sections pertain to MagLogLite except those that refer to logging such devices as Gamma Ray Spectrometer Gyro ORE Trackpoint Il cable payout indicators etc However MagLogLite does include the ability to log other devices using the generic serial device logging option under Configure and Input Devices Recorded data may be processed using MagMap 2000 Check Geometrics website www geometrics com for the latest version of MagMap2000 Data Logger User s Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eiseuosccencucsaes sctuc sae socegccseswaes Ea AEE Sus skeaeuansdecsueesssseuadevecstesesceuesseseevecs 1 2 FIRST TIME START UP OF MA GLOG j cccccscccccscccscccccccccccscccsccsscccsceecs 2 2 SOFTWARE REGIS IRA LION nabarrean a a a e aE a a EE T ESENE 5 Do GELIINGSTARTED eonen E ONNEEN EAEan 6 Jl SOLAR DING ANEW SOR VEY aara a E E ae tae 7 3 2
56. change the speed at any time It is allowable for playback to skip same data samples to keep up if speed is set very high Move the Scrollbar slider to the most left position and the Speed control all the way to the left to play all the data at normal acquisition speed e lt lt and gt gt buttons will shift playback time in the past or in the future based on the time interval entered in the box just left of the lt lt button In this example 216 if user presses lt lt playback starting point shifts to 60 seconds back in past Pressing START restarts the survey from that point The time interval can be specified in seconds minutes or hours e Start begins playback To stop playback press Stop When the end of the line is reached playback will be stopped automatically Typically playback is used for data inspection after the survey The user can start playback at a high speed to examine the data stop it at interesting places scroll back and start again slowly A flag feature used to mark anomalous features in the magnetic field and on the GPS map can then be employed to specifically locate targets set amplitude and time parameters in slot trace properties This is a very powerful technique Explore the possibilities by stopping the playback at an anomaly and then right clicking on the peak and valley of the anomaly and selecting FISH FLAG You will see the corresponding positions of the sensor at the ti
57. character was lost due to disconnection of the device the trigger data sequence is distorted which appears as additional latency e g time stamp assigned to the data related to previous data not the current data One of the techniques employed by MagLog is to count the number of triggers in the trigger buffer that did not produce data For example if 10 trigger pulses were sent without getting data back the program knows that on the next data arrival the trigger and data buffers should be flushed because it is likely that there was data loss or a cable disconnection 62 Another method used to address this potential problem is to record the time of the data arrival MagLog records this time as a time difference in ms between the arrival and trigger event times Thus the arrival time can always be calculated that is to say with Geometrics MagMap2000 program which knows about this feature and computes the absolute arrival time on the data input load The following is the configuration dialog for the EM61 Mark II device EM 61 HARKII Settings Alias Device Hame Sample interval ms Jem t mlll 100 Batter Warming A ji Fort Settings Mas allowed number of missing triggers jo Cancel This is almost identical to EM61 except for the field Max allowed number of missing triggers discussed above Note To ensure proper operation and estimate overall latency of the system Geometrics recommends a latency test before
58. connections Serial port cannot be shared with other devices 78 Below is an example of data logged for 3DM GX1 TES eO Perel TCP eO Perel Ble COP ETL STC eOt Perel GET Ot Perel TEQ eO PC eT T26 COP ET 8f8 COP FET SIL CO PC ET GC9 COP FET TES COP el TCP COP ET Ble COP ET SIZ COP ET GCL CO PC ET TeO corre rel T 6 TO PC ET ezg TO Pe eT STL TO Pe eT G2O TOPE eT TeS TO Perel T r TO Pe eT Bce LO Pe eT STC TO Pe eT GCT TO Pet eT Teo TO Perel T2600 PC FET 828 OO PE ET STL OO PZ EeT G29 OO PE ET TeS OO PC ET TZP OO PC FET Ble OO PE ET STC OO PE ET GCT OO PFET TEO OO FC ET T 6 6S EC ET BCBG ECt eT STL 6G ect el GCO OGFES FET TES 6GFecrel TCP 6S crel BCE EGF ECF eT BTC 6G ect el GCL 6G ecr eT TEO eG ecrel T26 SGFEC FET Szo BGFEC FET STL SG tect el GCO SGFEC FET TES SG rece TCP SG tecre l BCE SGFEC FET BIC SGC eT GCL 8Gt ect el TEO 8G EZIET ITZ6 LG IEZIET BCE LGFEC FET L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO0 L0 9T ZO L0 9T Z0 L0 9T ZO0 L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 LO 9T ZO0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 L0 9T ZO 0 9T Z0 0 9T Z0 L0 9T Z0 L0 9T Z
59. controls the Value Mark format Font This entry selects the font and the color for the Value plot 7 WMint windows Starting with version 2 88 MagLog has a special feature called mini windows Mini windows provide the ability to place different types of information digital analog etc in small child windows child means a sub window which are displayed independently in parent windows Each mini window 1s created as a child of any of parent device display window including the GPS display window and each has the following properties While sitting inside its parent it 1s without a header However in can be dragged and resized using the mouse A context menu is available using a right mouse click The mini window hides the part of its parent behind it A mini window can be dragged out of its parent and even out of the main MagLog application window As soon as it is out of the parent it appears with a header and the normal menu and can be dragged anywhere on the screen For instance if two monitors are used one for remote display at another location see Wwww imaxivista com for remote display over network connection it can be dragged to the second monitor to show another person some essential information such as depth If dragged back into parent window it is displayed without the header again 114 Mini windows is designed to be big or small and offer the ability to spread MagLog display on multiple screens poss
60. created from display slot the device alias name is included 118 Flags are numbered Each flag is tagged with MagLog PC time Flag type can have these values FISH user created flag from display slot and requested Fish position This is possible only if Interpolator is running In this case position is position of the magnetometer GPS user created flag from display slot and requested GPS boat position always available MAP user created flag at mouse location on GPS display not on the device slot User flags are plotted on the GPS display as crosses of constant size with associated labels Label names can be turned off for clarity when many anomalies have been identified in a small area If Plot flag ID is unchecked no flag names are plotted on GPS screen User can change flag s name and position by selecting flag in the list and pressing Edit button The following dialog appears Edit flag Flag anchor Longitude j ce ee 20r Latitude 37 51 36 4121 OF Cancel Name and position can be changed as desired All flags have the following attributes scroll the flag list to the right to view all of them Flag name Flag type Longitude Can be displayed or exported as decimal degrees degrees and minutes or degrees minutes and seconds Latitude Can be displayed or exported as decimal degrees degrees and minutes or degrees minutes and seconds Date and time This is playback time not
61. currently displayed on the MagLog display The automatically configured print layout does not recreate exactly what the user sees on the MagLog screen The program uses the following set of rules to convert the screen layout to the paper layout e Only waterfall slots are represented on the printed page Their relative widths are computed to be proportional to widths on the screen Digital displays including mini window displays are not represented on the page layout e Each display waterfall slot is translated into one printer slot e Ifa display slot has a fixed scale the corresponding paper slot also has a fixed scale 129 e GPS position and Flags are printed using marks If real time interpolation is used the position of the shifted point is also printed Flags are plotted in the first slot GPS latitude and longitude on the second and interpolated position on the third If there are less then three slots some information can be omitted If slots are too narrow information may not be readable e The page duration is selected as double that of the maximum slot duration on the screen In general the automatically generated page layout is a good starting point for refining the layout After the layout is initially generated the user may change slot widths page duration and other parameters see the section below on how to configure the layout manually Then the layout can be saved and used in the subsequent surveys The softwar
62. ee AIT rarr Rooogaoo ooo SG Oe Gee Oo eee oO Back Hest gt Cancel 4 8 Configuring system wide Windows printer While dot matrix printers offer continuous printing they are also noisy and in general becoming obsolete For that reason MagLog provides the option to use printers supported by the Microsoft Windows operating system MagLog can use any printer installed with a Windows driver including network or virtual printers for instance Adobe Acrobat writer software or FreePDF software to create PDF files on the fly The main difference between dot matrix or the Printrex brand thermal printer is that output is created page by page not as a continuous paper tape Windows printer output is highly configurable with a preview option available during the survey For more information please see Using Windows printers and print drivers MagLog ships with set of pre defined printer layouts for different configurations created by the MagLog printer wizard Based on settings selected on the previous screens MagLog displays the appropriate layouts for the survey Below is the typical wizard screen for Windows printers 25 Windows network printer setup o x To use any of the spstem wide printers including network printers check Use windows printer bos Then select appropriate layout from the list it i pre elected for you based on your magnetometer and position elections Press
63. flags buttons Clipping is highly recommended if shape files are used because they can cover a considerable area like the entire coastline of the US while just a small area may be needed during a survey or survey playback Clipping also reduces the program overhead the map file should be as small as possible and still cover the area of interest Output file Set output ASCII file used by MagLog If Append data to file box is not checked then file is overwritten if it exists If the append box is checked the program appends lines to the end of the existing file allowing sequential build of MagLog maps for the area Create MagLog map file button produces an actual file loadable as a survey plan The user must press this button to create a map before leaving the dialog box if he or she wants to generate a map After the Create MagLog map file button 1s pressed the program will process all elements shape files user marks and lines in 108 the list This may take a while The result is a file that can be used as a MagLog Survey plan file e Append data to the file If this box is checked new map elements are added to the existing file without erasing the file This allows you to keep previous a MagLog survey plan as part of the new plan Note Be careful while using this feature The map file MUST BE IN THE SAME DATUM AS INCOMING GPS DATA For example if the GPS is transmitting WGS 84 coordinates and you are using a nationa
64. for the COMM DRV software This information is provided here for troubleshooting purposes only You can skip to the next section if the driver is running properly The driver is controlled by the registry key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services wesccdrv Value 0 Name DisplayName Type REG SZ This section is taken from the COMM DRV manual COMM DRV COMM DRV NT COMM DRVILib COMM DRV VxD COMM DRV Dos are trademarks of Willies Computer Software Co WCSC 206 Data Value Name Type Data Value 2 Name Type Data Value 3 Name Type Data Value 4 Name Type Data Value 5 Name Type Data Value 6 Name Type Data Value 7 Name Type Data Value 8 Name Type Data Value 9 Name Type Data COMM DRV NT wesccdrv sys ErrorControl REG DWORD 0x1 Start REG DWORD 0x2 Type REG DWORD Ox WCSCMaxPorts REG DWORD 0x10 WCSCInBufLen REG DWORD 0x400 WCSCOutBufLen REG DWORD 0x400 WCSCInBufHigh REG DWORD 0x3f0 WCSCInBufLow REG DWORD 0x20 ImagePath REG EXPAND SZ SystemRoot System32 drivers wesccdrv sys 207 The keys DisplayName ErrorControl ImagePath Start and Type are specific to Windows NT loading of the kernel device drivers The keys WCSCMaxPorts WCSCInBufLen WCSCOutBufLen WCSCInBufHigh and WCSCInBufLow are specific to wesccdrv sys Complete information on these keys can be found in the Windows NT
65. if TTL or Serial event mark device is present If checked MagLog prints GPS position and or event number only when event actually arrives If not checked the same information 1s printed equidistantly regardless of possible events Picture below shows typical MagLog printout It consist of next elements e Header Each trace has its name scale paper origin and size and value printed It 1s possible to print the same trace with different scale in different slots or in the same slot e Separators For clear view slots can be separated with solid lines e Print trace value on wrapping When trace is wrapping current trace value is printed on the left side of the slot To avoid overlapping next field value cannot be printed at distance shorter then 3 cm along the paper e Position Latitude and Longitude e Event numbers fixes are printed after position if event device is available Alternatively only event numbers can be printed no position 153 GEOMETRIES Maglog exe Survey F data maglog_testse sevent4 Survey Tuesday April 3 2001 at 15 06 32 Configuration Secs amiet pragina Width 1 S5cale 100 000 Value 1697 race Name sig2 Origin 1 Width 1 Scale 100 000 Value 1709 6 TAF Trace Name magi Origin 2 Width 4 Scale Value 49691 5 lt Mey t j EST Trace Name magl Origin 6 Width Scale 20 Value 49691 5 d hae L eale jpu Trace Name grad Origin 1 Width Scale Value 2 3 drag Jar Trace Name grad Orig
66. if customer wants to display values in units other than those specified by the calibration units The depth sensor is typically calibrated in meters to display its reading in feet use the following formula 3 28 3 and type ft as units for digital display Note that Linear combination trace can be represented with a constant like 50 This means that the program will display and print a horizontal line Trace Color This represents the color of the trace Each trace can have its own color To change the color of a trace click on Change Color The following dialog box shown below allows you to select the color Color Ed x Basic colors BEZE Bar mnnunnnunnnn Da Custom colors if it a ip ip g g BEE EEE ee Define Custom Colors gt cence Once you have defined your trace color click OK Min Max Auto Detection MagLog has the ability to automatically detect the minimum and maximum values in the data as excursions occur during survey As soon as min max 90 point has been detected the program sets a user flag on the GPS map and saves the position in the user flag list See Using flags below Any trace can be used for setting flags however the user should not overuse this feature as a crowded map will result The following parameters are used for automatic flagging e Enable This enables flagging for the trace e Label prefix This is the prefix used in the flag ID e Dat
67. increment Step to increase decrease counter value Negative value will decrease counter positive increase it This is an integer value only Hold off time After program has received a pulse it will not react to any additional pulses during this hold off time interval This provides protection from switch contact bounce or ringing in the wire that could produce false interrupts The Next group of parameters is effective only if device is powered by the DRVX28 driver Win9x If the device is based on Geometrics custom parallel port driver NT operating system only these parameters need to be set directly in the Windows Registry Contact the factory for more information regarding our customer parallel port driver set up for Windows NT Parallel port Port where TTL pulse is connected Note that you still can use this port for the dongle key and for printing however you will need a special adaptor to disconnect pin 10 from printer side and connect it to TTL pulse source Contact Geometrics for more information if you want to use this event mark or pulse counting feature IRQ Interrupt line for printer port interrupt Usually it is 7 for LPT1 and 5 for LPT2 However this value can be changed in the BIOS setup for the on board parallel port or 69 by switches for ISA parallel port extension card Consult your computer or extension card manual Address Parallel port base address Similar to IRQ this value can be altered by BIOS s
68. is limited if the box Only display data in the range below is checked If data is not in the desired range the last available value is displayed Note that the display can go blank after this dialog is called and until the next acceptable value is received at least one good value should be received to activate the display A typical use of this feature 1s for spike elimination For instance if the fish typically flies at 10 m elevation above the sea floor and due to bottom conditions the altimeter frequently gives spikes to maximum range 100 meters it makes sense to limit display by values between 0 to 20 meters In this manner spikes are eliminated and 1f fish is 20 m or more above the floor it is ina safe condition Note that Check data in the range setting above is still applied to the original non despiked value This flags conditions which arise when the device is not working properly The latest good value is still displayed but the background color changes It is recommended to select neutral color for Error color value described above such as light yellow or gray This keeps values clearly visible and the display less annoying in the case of multiple spikes yet the allows observation of device 117 errors In any case we always recommend testing the altimeter if spiking continues to determine if it is functioning correctly After you press the OK button the window begins showing the requested informatio
69. is plotted at the time when value is taken Lon is name of the mark assigned by the user sep 29s stands from separation 29 seconds It means these marks are printed each 29 seconds 2 cm on the paper in this example Typical legend for flags Flags are just special case of mark labels Icon on the left plotted at time when flag is set all means all flags are plotted Bottom slot annotations mag nT W 5 00 50 00 mag10 nT W 500 00 depth m L 2 00 15 00 0 00 signal R 500 00 500 00 2500 00 Flag example A N AN f G Vi LA G T E DLM 30 1900 Bottom annotation for wrapped trace mag nT are trace name and units both are assigned by the user W stands from wrapped 5 00 is grid interval if grid is requested 50 00 is total span on the slot for this trace Bottom annotation for wrapped trace mag10 nT are trace name and units assigned by the user User selected mag10 to indicate that scale of trace is 10 times of mag trace scale W stands from wrapped There is no grid requested therefore no grid interval 500 is total span of the slot for this trace Bottom annotation for trace with fixed scale in this example used for depth L stands from left It means that maximum value 15 meters in this example is onthe left side of the slot It also can be seen in range indication 15 00 0 00 Trace values out of this range are not plotted Bottom annotation
70. is used in layback calculations 1 INTERPOLATOR cannot interpolate UTM Interpolator cannot interpolate GPS position at magnetometer sample times and shifted positions this means that the log file does not have any useful position information Check 1f GYRO was requested on tab TRK but there is no gyro attached to the computer 2 3 INTERPOLATOR cannot interpolate Lat Lon This 1s the same as the section above but the output has been requested as longitude and latitude 4 5 INTERPOLATOR cannot interpolate ORE If no underwater positioning system ORE TrackPoint II is available but an acoustic target interpolation was requested the Interpolator outputs this message Check the TRK tab in Interpolator setup and make sure Use ORE Trackpoint IT box 1s not checked Box Use serial gyro to calculate position can be checked even if ORE II 1s pot present however GYRO must be connected to the computer in this case 6 INTERPOLATOR cannot interpolate aux points The usual reason for this message is that the user requested computation of the auxiliary position based on a position of the acoustic target when there is no ORE II system In this case the Interpolator fails to compute these positions however still computes positions of the GPS and shifted point Go to Check Positions tab of the Interpolator setup and make sure there are no positions with type Target Remove them if they are present Restart survey
71. it is set to 0 but it will automatically exit if you set it equal to one TimerCheckInterval Controls timeout for every serial device to report stop data flow error Time in ms Console window If 1 DOS console window is started All MagLog debug printout is going there This is for developers only Windows98FontProblem Some of the early MagLog distributions had problems with True Type fonts under Windows 98 Setting this value to 1 causes MagLog to always use system font for slot map annotations KeithleyIntDevice If 0 CTM 10 card generates internal interrupts If 1 output of CTM 10 is connected to one of the parallel ports ASCII symbol for degree Decimal value for ASCII symbol to serve as a degree sign In most systems this is 176 DEFAULT DEVICE BUFFER SIZES These are variables that control the maximum history MagLog can acquire and display during survey For instance 1f the GPS is sampling at 10 times per second and GPSMaxSample 7200 then MagLog can display 720 seconds or 12 minutes of GPS position data If GPS 1s sampling once per second MagLog can display 2 hours of GPS history Ifthe magnetometer is sampling at 10 Hz and 880MaxSample 2000 then maximum display slot duration is 200 seconds if the user sets bigger value the slot will not be completely filled with the data The following variables control history length 235 AADCMaxSample 2000 EM61MaxSample 2000 AnalogMaxSample 2000 DeviceMaxSam
72. just one Latitude and longitude are given in decimal degrees and indicates Western longitude or Southern latitude Optional label text can be added after the longitude to be plotted on the screen Text size is not scaled with the map that makes it easy to recognize at any map magnification Survey area polygon can be added to the plan file in the following manner SurveyAreaStart 8 7250981170 30 32 092640 g J 200981190 30 328732130 P e40 L35300 00 328 7321350 6 17 AL 0 LIU 30 327066100 SurveyAreaEnd 102 The keywords SurveyAreaStart and SurveyAreaEnd mark the beginning and end of the survey area polygon If multiple areas are included in the file only the last one is accepted The survey area is displayed in the GPS window as a shaded polygon The polygon color is user selectable from within MagLog usually a light color It is suggested to use a light color to avoid obscuring of other plan features and the GPS track for instance light grey or green A most important feature of the survey area map 1s that data logging can be started automatically when boat or fish enters area see Auto logging feature and automatically stopped when the boat or fish leaves the survey area While the user could prepare the survey area polygon coordinate file with a text editor to facilitate the creation of the survey area plan we have provided a special tool to convert GPS flags into the following plan
73. least every This specifies how often the position will be printed given in centimeters of paper fed through the printer 10 3 2 2 Configuring PRINTREX DOT Matrix printer Printrex configuration dialog differs from the GR33 Printer Settings H adriare Chart Speed 0 001 2 mms eooo Printer Pintex85 Parallel Port LPT Address ox378 How to print position marks I Print GPS latitude amp lonatitude Print Lat Lon az Degrees min amp seconds At column 0 1 4 f 2 cm At least every f M Print on event marks only OF Cancel Chart Speed This is how fast the printer paper will go in mm per second Printer There are 6 choices available under Printer selection box L De 3 Printrex 8 5 Actual paper width for data plots is 19 cm Printrex 11 65 Actual paper width for data plots is 19 cm Epson generic 8 dot Low quality matrix printer with actual paper width 17 cm for data plots Note that 24 pin printers normally can work in this mode Epson generic 24dot High quality matrix printer with actual paper width 17 cm for data plots You must physically have a 24 pin printer to use this mode Epson generic 8 dot wide Low quality wide matrix printer with actual paper width 29cm for data plots Note that 24 pin printers normally also can work in this mode You need a wide printer to use this mode Epson generic 24 dot wide High quality wide matrix printer with actual paper wi
74. like Hyperterminal 200 Interpolator params Ea Mags TRK UTM Positions Net Point to point connection parameters W Enable Ethernet transmission Receiver F 220 jer 212 224 Port number 44965 Serial Qutput Enable serial output COM3S Baud Aate Important Points It is useful to input tow points when you can because these will allow MagLog to calculate the sensor positions in more than one way Then if you have a situation where a particular device malfunctions you have other calculations that you can fall back on MagLog will calculate all positions that you specify For instance you could also set up another set of points in the Positions dialog that are based on a shifted point Since you have a tow point MagLog will use the cable length to calculate a shifted point You could then use this point to get a series of three sensor position calculations based on this shifted point and use these calculations as back up calculations For multiple calculations of this type on the fly real time we suggest a high performance computer with a fast drive and lots of memory 17 6 Interpolator Diagnostic Messages In certain cases the Interpolator cannot compute all or some of the requested positions In this case the status light will remain red However when logging is started the log file size will increase In most cases there will be one dime diagnostic message on the screen in the form
75. magnetometer or which channel analog device such as depth transducer or which predefined accumulators GR 800 or GR 820 gamma ray spectrometers used in airborne survey you want to plot In the case of the earlier sample magnetometer string example 40001 24 0243 2001 1209 40291 35 0543 we plotted valid channels ranging from 1 7 In this case the numbers would correspond to 1 Counter 1 Field 2 Counter 1 Signal 88 3 Counter 1 Depth 4 Counter 1 Altimeter 5 Counter 2 Field 6 Counter 2 Signal 7 Gradient available only for 2 or more sensor systems Note The gradient will always be included anytime there is more than one sensor 1 e compatible with concatenated 880 881 823 only To get the channel number of the gradient take the total number of channels specified for the magnetometer in the above example six and add one Horizontal Scaling Ratio This is a full scale multiplicative coefficient that will be applied to the slot horizontal scale factor This allows the user to plot the same channel at different horizontal scale factors in the same slot The total width of the trace is found by multiplying the horizontal scale factor for the slot by the horizontal scale factor for the trace In the case of this example if we specified a horizontal scale factor of 2 and horizontal scaling specified in the slot configuration screen to be 128 the data would span a range of 256 If you had one t
76. of dialog box with an Ok button If the OK button is pressed the message disappears To see it again the user should start stop the Interpolator or start stop the survey If the message appears on the screen but Interpolator light is green this is a result of initialization of the system please just disregard the message The following section defines Interpolator messages and their meaning e Wrong INTERPOLATOR central meridian Please adjust in Output Devices Interpolator UTM Indicates that the Interpolator cannot perform an internal UTM transformation because the current GPS position is more than 6 degrees away in longitude from the central meridian Adjust the central meridian 201 setting in UTM setup If GPS 1s attached and running as it should be you will be give the opportunity to automatically correct the Central Meridian value Restart survey INTERPOLATOR cannot accept GPS positions Interpolator cannot use positions from the GPS This typically happens when the user mistakenly requests Use position of the tow point instead of GPS option on Mags tab of Interpolator setup dialog To use this function a GYRO compass must be available Please check Mags tab and uncheck the box 1f needed Restart survey INTERPOLATOR cannot accept MAG data Interpolator cannot use magnetometer data If the magnetometer is working correctly check if the depth sensor is calibrated properly and if the depth sensor reading
77. of data file Here is an example how MagLog parses an ASCII string We have used a symbolic format for clarity 11111822222s33333s44444s55555s66666 lt LF gt 6699 S Here 11111 66666 represents numerical fields and s represents a separator that can be any character which is not in the string 0123456789 EeDe To display a value 11111 in MagLog you should refer to it as channel 1 and to display value 66666 refer to it as channel 6 5 9 Configuring the RMS AADC Aircraft Compensator Go to Configure Input devices and select AADC magnetometer from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog Press Add and this configuration dialog appears AADC setup Device setup parameters Alias Device Mame AADC Number of Sensors fi sengor system Fort Settings Data QC parameters Wasimum magnetic field 40000 Minimum magnetic feld 50000 oth difference limit 0 1 OF Cancel Alias device name MagLog automatically knows the device name Number of Sensors Total number of magnetic sensors MagLog supports AADC systems with one to four sensors 47 Maximum Minimum magnetic field If recorded magnetic field does not fall into the preset range a QC Alarm is generated and the QC device light 1s turned from green to yellow difference limit If the magnetic field RMS 8 difference value is being calculated and it exceeds the preset limit a QC
78. properly It uses the ORE GYRO and the GPS to calculate the position of the acoustic target b ORE s calculation of acoustic target This is used when the ORE has a GYRO input available This is a better position point because errors due to GPS latency are minimized 4 Sensor Positions may be set up for as many sensors as required a Calculated as towed distance behind acoustic target This uses the ORE information and assumes that the magnetic sensor 1s a fixed distance behind the acoustic target It uses the same method as that used for the shifted point to calculate the position behind the ship b Difference in direction from GPS This is useful with horizontal gradiometers when there is a horizontal displacement between a line parallel to the course of the boat and the sensor c Difference in direction from shifted point This is almost the same as above except that a shifted point is used as a reference point instead All positions may be output in UTM or geographical Lat Long coordinates but geographical output is not recommended if the computer is underpowered or has a high workload Computers manufactured after 2002 should have no problem processing in geographical data mode 17 1 2 Output Capabilities The Interpolator is able to output data into a file through the serial port or via Ethernet 17 2 Menu oriented Interpolator setup This section explains how to set up the Interpolator using the normal sequence of th
79. quality control factors available are a Differential GPS fix required This will give a warning message if there is no differential fix available b Number of Satellites If the number of satellites is not at least as many as you specify you will get a warning message each time a new GPS reading comes in e g in the above example you will never get a warning message because there are always at least 0 satellites This can get rather annoying if you don t have enough satellites but it 1s a good indicator of the accuracy of the GPS coordinates It is commonly understood that 6 or more satellites are necessary to get the best position data 5 5 Configuring Serial Event device Serial Event Mark device is useful if some event is used as an index for all data streams and the user wanted to include an event number in every log file and print it Let s assume that some device generates strings like 1241 21 Feb 01 17 24 30 351783 12 146676 69 01 19 36 000 N 103 40 04 002 E Here is first number 1241 is a fix or shot event number To include this fix value into every log file and print it the user has to configure a Serial Event Mark device Note that the fix number is always an integer Go to Configure Input devices and select Serial Event Mark from the list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear Sernal Event Mark Device
80. see above so the offsets must be given with respect to this tow point If we hadn t specified a tow point these offsets would be given with respect to the GPS position We have also decided to enable median filtering with a filter size of 10 readings not mandatory but this will smooth the results 198 3 UTM Screen Interpolator params Mags l TAK UTM Positions Net M Use Internal UTM Geographical output Ellipsoid parameters Ellipsoid name iS E 198 Major asis meters Flattening UTM projection parameters Central meridian degrees 45 Scale factor 0 9666 for UT M 0 9996 Northing meters jo jo Easting meters Here we enable Use Internal UTM because the GPS outputs geographical latitude longitude coordinates GPGGA messages All known GPS receivers export data in this format and therefore this box always should be checked We then need to specify the ellipsoid parameters and UTM projection parameters These parameters are position dependent and need to be looked up or automatically calculated if GPS is plugged in and working Entering correct value for Central meridian is crucial If this value is not correct the Interpolator will not work and you will see a warning message at start up Please use UTM zones table and your current position to find appropriate Central Meridian value or connect GPS to the system and allow it to properly calculat
81. slots you have defined In this screen you have not specified any slots so it appears empty The options available allow you to add delete and edit existing slots Discussion in more detail follows Auto Add Slot This button allows you to create one slot and one trace for each value MagLog receives In the case of the sample input string 40001 24 0243 2001 1209 40291 35 0543 MagLog will create a window split into seven parts slots Each slot will have one graph trace that will correspond to a changing value in the above string The slots will be given default names such as Slot 1 corresponding to the changing value of 40001 24 Slot 2 corresponding to the changing value of 0243 etc This option is convenient for quickly getting a graph of all your data without having to customize each individual slot and trace Add Slot This button allows you to add a new slot Remove Slot This will remove a selected slot and remove all traces inside the slot 83 Properties This will allow you to edit the properties of an individual slot once it has been created Finish Exits the window Window setup This controls window orientation background color and font used for annotation It brings the next dialog box Slot window properties Onentatior Landscape Slot border color o Auto center time min 0 to disable E W Uzer same time scale for all slats changing one changes all Annotatio
82. software Binary Parser By pressing this button user can configure how to parse data It also allows enabling checksum computation The parser dialog is shown here x Data Channels Bias Roll _ 2 by es 0 00549316 U Pitch short 2 by eS 0 00549316 T Yaw z hort 2 by Yeg 0 00549316 T ticks E unsigned No 0 0065536 U delay 11 int 4 bytes Heo T gt Checksum 3DM Gx1 16 bit Add channel Remove Remove all Cancel By default it is blank Use Add channel button to add new channels to the device Then click directly on the table to modify name start byte type endiannes scale and bias You can also modify number of decimal places but it only used in MagMap2000 It is recommended if you use checksum presently only no checksum or 3DM GX1 computations 1s supported After your complete the channel table press Ok and Save to store all information into text file It is saved into survey file anyway so text file is not needed to run the survey Text file is needed to re parse data in the MagMap2000 If you modify parsing table for running device you might want to remove display for this device first You also might need to re start the survey After device dialog is completed press Ok and program brings you into Serial Port Setup dialog Select appropriate baud rate and port number here Note that this type of device also can be used with TCP IP but not UDP and real time serial port
83. the end of the section The depth reading from the magnetometer is an integer between 0 and 4095 This represents the full scale range of the depth transducer There may also be a certain offset that must be adjusted MagLog offers a few different ways to calibrate the depth Regardless of units selected for the survey recording data in feet or meters depth and altimeter are always calibrated in meters Note These methods also work for calibrating other analog channels 16 1 Calibration Procedure The basic procedure for calibrating the depth sensor is as follows 1 Place magnetometer in the water for at least 15 minutes at a known depth say 3 meters This will give the temperature of the sensor time to stabilize 2 Write down the depth and reading that MagLog gives you 3 Place magnetometer in the water at a DIFFERENT depth 163 4 Write down the depth and reading that MagLog gives you 5 Use either automatic calibration feature or manual calibration to apply results Note If you use automatic depth analog channel calibration you can do this while in the calibration screen 16 2 Automatic Depth Analog Channel Calibration 1 From your configuration screen you should select the magnetometer This should bring up the Settings screen that you originally used to input the number of sensors and analog channels You can get to this screen by going into your main list of devices and then double clicking on the m
84. the new settings to take effect 22 4 Installation of Printrex Printer Optional In order to be able to print from Windows you need to install a printer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Go to your Start Menu Select Settings gt Control Panel gt Printers Select the Add Printer option The next dialog box should ask you where your printer would be managed Select My Computer Check LPT as the port you would like to print to and press Next You will now be asked for the installation disk Click on Have disk Then type in the path where the installation files can be found namely a Select S20DL 1 6 ips Type in a printer name For the sharing select Not shared 10 You will then be asked to insert the Windows NT CD ROM and press OK 11 It will try to copy files from f 1386 When installation is completed you will see an icon of your printer appear in the Printers dialog box 22 5 Pulse drivers in MagLog distribution 22 5 1 Windows NT MagLog comes with next drivers available under Windows NT operating system e wdj sys This driver handles TTL pulse which can be connected to LPT1 It is also used to obtain time stamps for all data streams when program is running under Windows NT If for some reason this driver did not start you see next message after you start MagLog 243 wdi driver not loaded Will use DAWH23 if possible rou can safely ignore this message ok This means that you cann
85. the results will not be completely identical to real time interpolation because the real time Interpolator uses all the data available during survey including those positions received before logging began Re interpolation uses only logged data and therefore positions may differ at the start of the line from those obtained in real time However this difference is not significant as long as there were no sharp turns before the line started The Interpolator log file is used during playback and the user must reload the survey after re interpolation is complete in order to observe the interpolated positions Thus playback re interpolation works as a one way street although the old Interpolator file is automatically backed up as a bak file as described below The re interpolation procedure is described step by step in the following paragraphs 1 Start MagLog and load your survey in the playback mode as described above Then initiate the Interpolator 218 iad Maglog NT C MagLogData test Survey File Configure View Output Devices Print Settings Window Video Titler Printer Interpolator Interpolator ayback Interpolator output Status 2 MagLog will warn that the survey will be closed after interpolation is completed or cancelled maglog E 2 Calling interpolator setup in playback mode E Will cause position r interpolation After interpolation is completed survey will be closed autom
86. the survey time for flags set in playback mode Line Reflects logging status Words No line indicate that flag was set when data was not logged Otherwise it gives the line number CH1 CH4 First four device channels for the display where a flag was set Typically the devices would represent magnetic field sensor signal strength depth 119 and altitude if a flag was set using magnetometer display window If flag was set using GPS window all four channels are set to zero If Autosave on new map field flag is checked then the program automatically saves the flag list in the file each time a new flag is added This dialog box also allows merging flags from the different surveys If Append to the list is marked then the program does not clean flags when a new flag file is loaded Instead it increases the existing list With this option the user can read a few files sequentially remove unnecessary flags and save the remaining flags into new file as complete list All flags are drawn with the same selectable color All flags can be exported into an ASCII text file with positions formatted in the same way as they are formatted in the above dialog by pressing Export flags button Export file can be displayed in the Windows Notepad program and printed if required 8 1 Adding flags from display slots Figure below illustrates how flags can be added from display slots Set GPS Flag Set FISH Flag List flags Displa
87. this means that this port is controlled by the COMM DRYV and is in fact a real time port To assign COMM DRYV ports start MagLog and proceed to the Configure Map COMM DRYV ports menu If COMM DRYV driver is not properly installed or not running the error message Can not init COMM DRY service Check 1f wesccdrv sys is started is displayed In this case user should close MagLog and resolve COMM DRYV installation problems first If driver is installed and running properly you will see the following mapping dialog 209 Map COMM DRY ports gt x OnE 4 03710 0 9839 al Add port Edit port Remove Remove all Save Load nea Each string in the table has ten fields and corresponds to one port The meaning of the fields is as follows e COM port This is logical name under which port appears in the MagLog Names are unique e Card type Type of the serial port hardware Can be ISA for motherboard ports or PCI for extension card ports e Sub port This value should be 0 unless a multi port card is being used If a multi port card is being used then the first serial port on the multi port card is 0 The second port is 1 and so on e Base addresses For ISA base address of the 8250 or compatible chip like the 16450 16550 etc port e g Ox3f8 For PCI Vendor ID of the PCI card e IRQ For ISA 0 15 for IRQ1 IRQI5 for PCI Cards Device ID of the serial card e Ca
88. traning Survey GyroLompass gyro GYRO File a training Survey bl LBL File a training Survey Line umber LIN ENURMBER File 2 traning Survey loginfol bet Test Document a training Survey ORE ORE ORE File a training Survey Seral Device cable CABLE File E objectis T2 BKB Each file name starts with the Survey name followed by Survey then the type of device then the name given to the device in the configuration Data is logged to each file as it comes into the serial port A time stamp is added to provide positioning for all sensors with the GPS data No processing is done to any files unless the Interpolator is turned on Thus the GPS file will have GPGGA strings stored exactly as they were received from the GPS with the addition of a time stamp added by MagLog and the magnetometer file will have a series of magnetometer strings stored also with a time stamp In the screen above the survey was named Training It had several device files G 880 magnetometer output file name training Survey 880 mag GPS output file name training Survey GPS gps GYRO output file name training Survey GyroCompass gyro ORE output file name training Survey ORE ORE Cable length measuring device output file training Survey Serial Device cable These data files can be analyzed and plotted using MagMap2000 a free processing program from Geometrics Files can be reformatted fo
89. will exit 3 To use MagLog or MagLogLite you must always have the software key dongle connected to a parallel port of the PC on which the software is installed or you must have a digital key code from Geometrics see below Start the program again and you will be operating as either MagLog or MagLogLite depending on which program you purchased 4 You may install MagLog on as many computers as you wish but only the computer with the software key connected will be able to acquire data If you have installed with a software key you may ignore steps 5 6 and 7 5 If you do not have a software key or have lost it when you start MagLog it will be running as a demo version of MagLog This means that you cannot read data from the serial ports only playback surveys from files To enable the software for logging use you must contact Geometrics Inc to obtain a Registration Number BEFORE YOU CONTACT US YOU MUST FOLLOW THIS PROCEDURE First click on Help About and write down your User Code Then contact Geometrics Inc via either e mail telephone or fax and inform us of your User Code In response Geometrics will provide to you il your Registration Number Write this number on the blank Registration Disk To learn more about software registration see Software registration Geometrics Inc Tel 408 954 0522 Fax 408 954 0902 E mail sales mail geometrics com 6 With your Registration Number at hand start
90. 02 012333 186826 SUAS 8825 0845 oF OV 03 02 O12 53 elo 926 S 41530 820 0040 57 10703702 01 753219 026 2 204 e20Zy70 70s Se 10703702 OT 719 126 S S20283955 0509 oo 0703707 Olt 55219 226 S S00 Sot oeI 0EOL So TOO 02 Cie sss l9e327 S 25409 158 0610 59 TOVO 3702 sOLtS 329 427 S 23 o Geor OOTA 39 UZ OS 702 Uso sel 5277 S CLO S0 I 2y010o So WOT 08702 Ole 31962 7 S A155 36 006 08l3 So TOVO 702 Ole So 19 727 gt Ala sou Or 0GA So 107037027 Ole S38 LO 38277 oS e806 019s 59 _ LOL 037 02 013s L927 Look for a place where the column before date changes its value This indicates a new event mark occurrence In the example above values 57 58 and 59 are event mark numbers you will have different numbers At 58 the switch was closed and magnetometer started recording a noisy field reading shift caused by the electromagnetic field At 59 the switch was opened and the magnetometer returned to the normal field readings Therefore in the above example there is virtually no latency However if the event counter has changed but magnetometer was still recording a steady field there is latency in the system that will eventually appear as a position error in the survey results This latency can be removed spatially Let us say that we detect an average latency of 40ms Let us imagine we are traveling in a boat at 6 knots about 10 ft per second Then the amount of spatial offset 1s not much maybe only a few inches
91. 11 215 217 229 Port Settings 39 42 43 230 Positive and negative 113 printer 28 147 148 151 152 153 156 243 Printrex 243 Pulse 12 10 16 18 65 PULSE 12 65 67 Pulse devices See quality control 39 40 41 42 97 Real Time Serial driver 205 Reference Point 169 183 Reset Configuration 36 Sample Files 228 Scale factor 178 Send Configuration 36 Sensor Positions 170 serial output 185 195 Serial port 30 Set Flag 140 Shifted Point 169 183 slot 82 83 84 85 86 87 92 148 Slot 82 83 84 85 86 87 92 148 Software registration iv 5 Speedometer 68 72 Stack gravity azimuth 113 Stack plot 113 stack profile 110 Stack scale 113 status bar 157 158 238 Survey Survey 111 iv 7 9 10 65 155 156 162 163 178 Survey area 102 Survey plan 102 Survey units 12 161 Target 181 183 TCP IP 27 29 30 33 35 183 184 241 Titler 150 Tow point 172 173 175 192 194 195 197 198 201 trace 82 85 87 90 92 Trace 22 82 85 87 88 90 91 92 147 148 Transmitters 144 triggered devices 73 TTL 1 67 68 69 70 153 243 Use depth for layback 18 User lines 106 User map 109 User marks 105 Using comments 122 UTM 151 152 153 170 175 176 177 178 193 195 199 UTM Projection Parameters 177 Value plot 114 Vertical Scaling 85 Width 149 Windows NT 238 239 240 241 242 243 Windows printer 2
92. 3 Filter Size 175 Flag 118 119 120 121 formula 111 FreePDF 25 G 858 64 65 G 877 i11 10 16 18 48 49 G 877 depth calibration 53 248 G 880 1 10 15 16 34 35 39 48 82 89 91 93 147 156 157 158 162 163 167 169 229 231 Generic serial device 45 Geographical Output 176 178 193 geographical projection 96 GPS 37 41 42 82 91 96 97 98 100 103 109 150 151 153 156 157 158 162 169 170 172 173 175 176 181 183 190 192 193 194 195 197 198 199 GR33 151 152 GR800 44 88 156 Gradient 89 Gradient plot 99 Grid Lines 86 GYRO 162 170 172 173 174 175 190 192 195 198 Honeywell PPT 80 Horizontal Scaling 86 89 149 hot keys 121 Hyper Terminal 53 IGRF 49 50 Input Devices Configuration 28 41 91 147 148 internal sampling rate 231 Internal UTM 176 177 193 199 interpolator 162 163 167 169 170 171 172 190 191 228 Interpolator Output 183 185 Latency 221 222 223 line number 150 155 157 159 logging 155 157 158 159 161 longitudinal gradient plot 110 MagLog page 124 127 Maglog ini 85 Magnetometer array offset 172 Master Clock Card 213 Matrix printer 152 median filtering 175 198 mini window 115 Northing Easting 178 Number of Satellites 42 on track plots 110 ORE Trackpoint 43 170 174 192 195 198 Origin 149 Output Files 161 Password Protection 228 Playback 1
93. 38 045E 042E 048E 09 129W 132W 126W 39 051E 048E 054E 10 123W 126W 120W 40 057E 054E 060E Il 117W 120W 114W 41 063E 060E 066E 12 111W 114W 108W 42 069E 066E 072E 13 105W 108W 102W 43 075E 072E 078E 14 099W 102W 096W 44 081E 078E 084E 15 093W 096W 090W W 45 087E 084E 090E l6 087W O90W 084W 46 093E 090E 096E 17 O8lW 084W 078W 47 099E 096E 102E 18 075W 078W 072W 48 105E 102E 108E 19 069W O72W 066W 49 111E 108E 114E 20 063W 066W 060W 50 117E 114E 120E 21 O57W 060W 054W 5l 123E 120E 126E 22 OSI1W O054W 048W 52 129E 126E 132E 23 24 25 26 ae 28 29 30 045W 039W 033W 027W 021W O1SW 009W 003W 048W 042W 042W 036W 036W 030W 030W 024W 024W 018W O18W 012W 012W 006W 006W 000E 59 60 135E 141E 147E 153E 159E 165E 171E 177E 132E 138E 138E 144E 144E 150E 150E 156E 156E 162E 162E 168E 168E 174E 174E 180W Obtained from Software Documentation for GCTP General Cartographic Transformation Package National Mapping Program Technical Instructions U S Geological Survey National Mapping Division Oct 1990 b Scale factor c Northing Easting Input 0 9996 for UTM coordinates These are constant values that you would like to add to your UTM coordinates UTM coordinates are large numbers on the order of a million meters but your survey may only be looking at thousands of meters This allows you to simplify your final numbers by adding or subtracting a large offset These values will not be
94. 5 127 Windows Printer 123 Windows printers and print drivers 122 Wizard iii iv 10 11 13 15 17 18 20 22 X Y offset for hydrophone 174
95. 6176 Adaptec AHA 294007 2940002940 0x9710 0x9535 MetMos 9835 PCI Multi I 0 Con ox Note the user may have to guess which string represents his serial hardware and select it After all settings are entered the user has the option to test the port This is always a good idea because otherwise it might be hard to track COMM DRYV related problems Press Test port button and the test dialog is shown Baud rate S600 af Termination char decimal fio Fort input data 14043 160 0205 14023 054 0205 14016 009 0222 14016 003 01 930 14016 003 0217 14016 003 0244 14016 003 0205 14016 003 0205 13991 663 0277 13961 699 0212 13956 1 70 0205 a Display format as CII Y Close Connect a device with a known baud rate and format To test the port select the baud rate in the dialog above and press Start button The button will turn into a Stop button and gray out the baud rate and termination char fields Data is shown in the middle of the dialog box It is possible to show data as a hexadecimal dump or 212 as a decoded EXESS 3 message using the Display format selection remember that for EXCESS 3 the termination character with a decimal 42 is needed As a part of system setup the following procedure can be recommended e Have manuals on your serial hardware and software readily available including this manual e Select a reliable source of the serial data know
96. 7 After this is finished locating these it will ask you to verify whether the devices found are correct If they match those listed above press ENTER Windows NT will finish loading necessary drivers 8 Insert Windows NT Workstation CD when prompted Be sure to remove your installation disk from the disk drive Wait a few seconds and then press ENTER 9 Windows NT will next show a licensing agreement You can proceed by using the Page Down key to get to the bottom of the license agreement and press F8 to continue 10 In some cases you might be told that setup has found Windows NT on your hard disk This will happen primarily when you are overwriting an old installation You can choose ENTER if you wish to try to preserve existing settings note this will probably NOT fix problems with device drivers and corrupted program installations To completely overwrite all of your old Windows NT settings press N THE FOLLOWING ASSUMES A NEW INSTALLATION OPTION N 11 Setup will give you a list of optional keyboard layouts You can press ENTER to edit these or accept the default NOTE You can later change or add new keyboard and mouse settings from within the Windows NT Control Panel 12 You then are given options for creating and deleting disk partitions It 1s usually beneficial to keep existing partitions To install Windows NT on a selected partition press ENTER 239 13 You will now be given the option of formatting your selecte
97. Alarm is generated and the device light is turned from green to yellow For the RMS AADC to be used with MagLog it must be configured on the front panel so that it outputs the following information 1 Start char symbol 2 Scan number integer value 7 digits max 3 X component Fluxgate nT real number 4 Y component Fluxgate nT real number 5 Z component Fluxgate nT real number 6 Uncompensated mag nT real number 7 Uncompensated magN nT real number 8 Compensated magl nT real number 9 Compensated magN nT real number 10 Error code integer Here N cannot be more then 4 and the user must configure the settings appropriately MagLog does not parse 1 and 2 so the logical channels start with 3 X fluxgate 5 10 Configuring G 886 G 877 proton magnetometers Like the Geometrics cesium vapor magnetometers our proton precession magnetometers require MagLog to query the device to determine the hardware configuration and to set up the system To set up the G 886 or G 877 magnetometer go to Configure Input devices and select 886 Magnetometer used with both 886 and 877 from the list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and this configuration dialog box will appear 48 Cycle rate s li Tuning nT 50000 Where to get turing IGRF take position from gt Port Settings Data QC parameters Maximum magnetic held zooo Minimum magnetic Hel
98. Configure Display slots menu item or from the context menu right click and Display All slots item will appear The latter two methods are recommended because MagLog does not re initialize the device if the nput Devices Configuration dialog is not called At this point in time after adding a single trace you should see your main configuration screen appear as This window gives you a lot of useful information By looking at the list of connected input devices it allows you to see how many windows and slots you have for each device You can also see there is currently no display set up for the GPS 0 Windows This will be discussed later To edit the display for the G 880 press Slots Traces for Display the same dialog is accessible from Configure Display slots main menu item or from context menu item 9 Display All slots This will again bring you into the window that shows the slots you have defined Display Configuration defined slots FILED Vert Scalingfin s 120 000 Hrz Scaling 1 000 0 Traces AUTO ADD SLOT I REMOVE SLOT PROPERTIES WINDOW SETUP EQUALIZE SLOTS FINISH This window shows one slot with one trace You can further edit this slot by pressing Properties or you can add a new slot by pressing Add Slot This will discuss how to add an additional slot with two traces and will show the resulting window To add an additional slot pr
99. DP connection to the desired host This mode allows passing through a network gateway and broadcasting to the host of another network The name of the host or its IP address is required UDP broadcast connection to any host on the local network which require it see above Second a group of the controls related to the RS 232 transmission e Serial Output Check this box to make serial output available If the box is not checked there would be no serial output from the program e Port Serial port number to be used for data re transmission Make sure the port 1s available The port cannot be shared with a different transmitter within MagLog 146 Note special real time ports handled by COMM DRV by WCSCNET com cannot be used e Baud rate Transmission baud rate to be used by the transmitter Your receiver must use the same rate On the right side of the dialog there is a list of Devices available for re transmission To include a particular device just set the appropriate check mark You can also exclude devices from re transmission in this manner After the dialog is complete press the OK button to close Transmission starts or is altered when the transmitter list dialog is closed The Cancel button keeps the existing configuration intact 10 2 Configuring Slots Traces for Printer You can control what the printer outputs by adding slots and traces to the printer You have the ability to control the types of tra
100. EE SA0 Please contact Geometrics to obtain REGISTRATION NUMBER and enter it below Registration number 288 0 56 94 5331 IF you have any questions please contact us Geometrics Inc 2190 Fortune Dr San Jose CA 95131 USA TEL 408 954 0522 Fax 408 954 0902 e mail salest mail geometrics cor Cancel e Contact Geometrics by phone or e mail and obtain your Registration number Type your registration number in the above dialog Press the Ok button e In the event that the error message Registration failed is posted on the screen double check your user code and contact Geometrics again When the correct registration code is typed in the following dialog is displayed Next time you install Maglog on the same PC vou don t have bo contact Geometrics about Registration Number IF you like to do so please insert blank Floppy in drive 4 and press OK Cancel We recommend you to create registration disk e This gives you an opportunity to save current registration file to a floppy disk If program is later re installed on the same computer you can use your registration floppy to enable software without repeating the registration procedure The floppy is valid only for particular computer and cannot be used for others Insert a blank floppy disk in the A drive and press the Ok button To skip writing the registration floppy press Cancel Your program w
101. F12 adds a flag at the current magnetometer location This key is enabled only if the Interpolator device is up and running The latest GPS time is used as the flag time and the corresponding fish position is taken as the flag position The user is prompted for the flag name If no flag name is assigned the default flag name is used 121 Note In this case Channel 1 4 values are taken from first device display except the GPS display In the case where multiple devices are used not only magnetometer and GPS these values may not represent magnetic field signal depth and altitude 8 4 Using comments to flag positions In addition to the User flags feature MagLog has another similar option called comments This feature can be called up via the Configure Comment menu item When initialized you will see the following dialog box Write comment Write your comment to the curent position here E Hint To start new line press CTAL Enter Write to file C SPrograrn Files Geometics smeo Survey COMMENT Browse Cancel By clicking on Browse you can modify the file name that will hold your comment information Typed comments are logged exactly as entered with a date and time stamp Pressing Enter will exit the screen and save the comment To start a new comments line press CTRL Enter MagLog does not display these comments The comment file is intended for later reference o
102. FJ J3 FJ J3 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 J3 00 43 43 43 J3 J3 J3 43 J3 J3 J3 43 43 J3 FJ J3 J3 JF 43 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 00 FJ J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 FJ PP qp ep cP GP qp PP PS OS GS G GS PS 6G 6S PS 3G qs 8S 6S 8S PS EG G JF PP oP LP ef oP oP GG 9G qs PS 6S 8S eg 9G 6S BG qs qs eg 9G 6G PS 8S PS 6S 6G qs JG Z9 aG T9 PS JG 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 PE8000 818000 J L000 294000 6P4L000 P8LO000 FIGLOOO PeL000 GSTLO000 039000 49000 989000 T89000 269000 E9000 ZT9000 P S000 8 S000 amp GO00 LS9000 68989000 PeEsooo 3089000 e po0o0 amp 2po000 OF FO00 4LP000 9SPr000 Te rooo 07000 000 f 000 P6e000 8Le000 S 000 f 000 60 000 P c000 I4Z000 P6c000 GLc2000 0S2000 4 c000 907000 T1000 gt 2qT000 6TOOO cLTOOO PF TOOO 8c TOOO OTOOO P0000 640000 760000 3790000 eF 0000 a amp zo000 000000 Note that each record consit of 11 data bytes 4 delay bytes and 22 byets o
103. GPS or magnetic fish position accordingly see Adding flags from display slots for more information List flags retrieves a dialog box with all existing flags listed allowing the user to save load and modify flag information Display All slots brings a dialog box that controls the appearance of the entire slots window Slot MAG MAG is substituted with actual name of the slot selected by the user retrieves a dialog box that controls the appearance of a particular slot Zoom In and Zoom Out zooms the data axis in the slot not the time axis The same functions have can be accessed via cursor keys on the keyboard Slot size adjustment Slot sizes can now be adjusted interactively using mouse Move your mouse cursor to the slot border right border for vertical orientation and bottom border for horizontal The mouse cursor will change its shape to indicate that the border can be moved you may need to try few times to catch right mouse position move mouse slowly near slot border Click and hold left button and drag slot border into new position then release the button You can see slot size changes permanently It is also possible to change slot order directly on the screen using the mouse function For instance to interchange the first and second slots do the following move the mouse cursor into the second slot press and hold left button You can see that the mouse cursor changes Now move the cursor into first slot a
104. IGRF model recommended when GPS is connected 49 For best operation the tuning value should be within the range of 500 nT of the average field in the survey area The IGRF model suits this criterion perfectly and is a good solution for quickly tuning the magnetometer even considering annual drift The program updates the tuning value when one of the IGRF options is selected For example if the user knows his approximate lat long position he may select JGRF enter your position in the drop list The following dialog appears Enter your approximate position Longitude decimal degrees 1242 Latitude decimal degrees 37 5 OF Cancel Enter the approximate position of the survey area in decimal degrees and the program calculates Earth s magnetic field at this point and uses the value to tune the G 877 or G 886 To enter another position just re select the same string in the drop list When user selects GRF take position from GPS the program will try to obtain the position from the last GPS reading If the GPS data is available the following message appears maglog a 1 IGAF model at Lon 87 25 Lat 30 34 was used to calculate tuning ok Check the reported position to ensure proper calculation of the reference field Port settings Set serial port communication settings Maximum Minimum magnetic field If recorded magnetic field does not fall into the preset range
105. INT for MagLog Interpolator if used and Flags for user s flags Select the appropriate device to plot data 133 Device channel Select the device channel to plot Popular devices like magnetometers or GPS report their channel by names while some of the devices report them by number Formula and Add Type in a formula here if composite formula 1s selected above Device alias Device channel and Add button can be used to create the formula interactively An example below considers the total water depth expressed in feet The following steps can be used to accomplish this 1 Select device MAG and channel depth Press Add button The new formula reads as 1 MAG depth 2 Keep device selection as MAG Select channel alt and press Add Formula now reads as 1 MAG depth 1 MAG alt 3 Because MagLog operates internally in meters we must modify the formula by hand to express total depth in feet 3 28 is coefficient to convert meters into feet 3 28 MAG depth 3 28 MAG alt Interpolate formula to step If composite formula is used then the data from multiple asynchronous devices will need to be interpolated to the same sample interval This field allows the user to specify the interpolation interval The other choice is to select Use auto step and the program will select the interpolation interval automatically Scaling type Controls how data is plott
106. Interpolator feature or using MagMap2000 Interpolation software in post processing We note that these latency errors are really only important when either high speed surveys are being conducted and or if the positions of small targets for instance with anomaly signatures less than 0 2m are important This might be the case in UXO or archaeological surveys but would not normally be the case in geological or mining or oil gas type surveys The following are error sources considered here e Errors in cable measurements including boat dimension measurements e Latency in the magnetometer to PC channel Due to nature of the Windows operating system data arriving into the computer serial port is not immediately available to the application MagLog Data is delayed in the system serial driver and therefore the time stamp assigned to the data by MagLog can be delayed as well Measurements showed that this delay typically does not exceed 20 100 ms depending on computer performance e GPS channel has the same source of latency as the magnetometer channel In addition GPS itself reports positions with some time delay due to Differential Position calculations which are typically around 50 ms These delays are dependent upon the hardware used during the survey Therefore it is always wise to check positional accuracies before the beginning the survey if there have been hardware changes To test overall system performance a distinctive magnetic ano
107. Name Enter a device name as you wish it to appear in MagLog Max string length Set buffer size to accommodate any possible string coming out of your device In many cases 2000 will work just fine but you should change this value if your device generates particularly long strings Max number of field to parse In this example MagLog will try to parse first 5 numerical fields of your string If the actual number of numerical fields in your string is more then 5 then you won t be able to display the rest of the values unless you change this number to a larger value If total number of fields is less then 5 then zero values are displayed for those fields where there is no data However the string will always be logged in its entirety regardless how many fields are set to parse for display purposes Termination char This is the last character of the string In the case of ASCII strings it is normally ASCII 10 LF or Line Feed Binary or BCD data If you device produces binary output MagLog logs this data as mixture of binary bytes and program added ASCII strings time and date If you check this box MagLog will convert and log the data in hexadecimal format This allows one to 46 create and log a file that consists of ASCII characters only hexadecimal code is in ASCII format Note Although binary data is logged to disk there is no display for binary data in MagLog and presently MagMap2000 processing software also will not accept this type
108. O L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T Z0 L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO L0 9T ZO OTOM OAN 0 90S QAJ wo od nAp Lo od aq Jo os nAq goros oAy 000m n Ay O OF PAL ogos nAq ovo q nAn ozoA nds TUI OAN qu S o L NU P o K FUOQ3 Q A uurs nA UxO A o uyos A u on oAx UQX BAT Au o oAx Buro OAL AU O OAS puto QAS lt u o O SUN N u lt o T Aur o jot ou O oAr qui o OAH qu o oAT uou N eweuu oA w ouu o4 urnguy poA pupul oA wi up eAx Tw uq oAg cm U OAA wU oA upu OAZ wzu uA wyu oA T gt U2 U Z eT us TAA eT up oAx nN Tul ndAl ATAQT AAX YTES S OTEQ qA INQ OAK Tve uA TTeQv ek MIs A eq ST Cd TA T ow ede TAQd SAL TbQo eA Te Te BE BE GE Te TE BE BE GE Te TE BE BE GE Te Te BE BE GE Te Te BE BE GE Te Te BE SE GE Te Te BE SE GE Te Te SE SE GE Te Te BE BE GE TE TE BE BE GE Te Te BE BE GE Te Te BE EE cE cE Te cE EE lE cE Te cE EE cE cE Te cE EE lE lE TE lE EE lE lE TE lE EE lE lE TE lE EE lE ZE TE ZE EE ZE lE TE ZE EE ZE ZE Te cE EE lE cE Te cE EE ZE cE Te cE EE cE cE GE Pe EE
109. PC software The only way to resolve this problem is to synchronize the PC time with UTC time However the PC time 1s not accurate and in fact MagLog does not use PC time It uses system PerformanceCounter and PerformanceFrequency calls instead A special GPS card from MasterClock see http www masterclock com installed in the PC allows MagLog to obtain the value of the UTC time at the turn of each UTC second and synchronize the MagLog time system with UTC This leads to the superior timing performance and allows treating MagLog time stamps as if they were made in UTC time local time zone should be taken into account gt Synchronization takes local time zone into account MagLog time stamps are in the local time 213 To take advantage of the GPSPCI card it should be installed in the computer along with its drivers The GPS antenna should be able to see enough satellites to operate properly The Master Clock device should be added to the MagLog survey Once added Master Clock device will interrogate the GPSPCI card in user selected intervals typically one second to find the Performance Counter value at the turn of the whole UTC second and correct MagLog time To add Master Clock device do the following e Go to the menu Configure Input devices and select Master Clock GPSPCI in the list on the left side Press Add gt gt button e If for some reason the GPSPCI card or its drivers are not loaded this would b
110. POSSIBLE 17 2 2 TRK Dialog This dialog box sets up the ORE device Interpolator params Mags THK UTM Positions Met Number of acoustic targets E gt offset for hydrophone m lo t offset for hydrophone m 0 Enable median filteag Filter size i Use serial Gyro to calculate position Cancel Use ORE Trackpoint II This enables the ORE device If you don t have a GYRO this should not be enabled unless the GYRO is connected to the ORE II directly via an analog input However the Gyro compass can be used to enhance the computation of sensor positions even if the ORE device is not available particularly when there are cross currents which can cause the direction of travel and the heading of the ship to be different Number of acoustic targets Fill in the number of ORE targets you have In most configurations one is used X Y offset for hydrophone This is used when the GYRO 1s not connected directly to the ORE If it is these offsets will be input into the ORE and the final position point that 174 is output will be correct with respect to the GPS or tow point If the GYRO is not connected the computer needs to transform the position the ORE calculates and take into account the position of the ORE The values you will want to input will be summarized in the table below Use serial Gyro to calculate position This should be enabled if the Gyro is connected to MagLog e g not conn
111. PS configuration step the central meridian will be computed and entered automatically To enable the Interpolator function just click Yes I want real time layback calculation and fill in the subsequent information If you answer No then the set of subsequent screens are skipped and this feature is disabled If you answer Yes be prepared to answer questions about your boat and cable geometry 19 The Wizard does not cover all possible aspects or subcomponents of the nterpolator configuration such as the use of a GYRO compass or ORE TrackPoint I underwater positioning system When you are using such systems you should configure the Interpolator manually see below The next screen allows you to choose between two basic single sensor or gradiometer sensor array configurations for multiple sensors Note the gradiometer applications are many and varied primarily associated with wider swath of coverage transverse horizontal or removal of the diurnal field variations longitudinal or enhancement of nearby point objects as in UXO surveys vertical Contact Geometrics for more details Interpolator Setup f Longitudinal Transverse Pick the picture which best fits Your real geometry Be ready to enter the values A B C D C1 and C2 Even if you have just only one magnetic sensor Magloag always calculates two positions in this case do not pay attention to the second one On the nest screen enter the
112. Remove and Remove All delete selected or all port mapping accordingly Buttons Save and Load save the table as an ASCII file for future reference or loads a previously saved table Note that table is saved anyway along with all MagLog parameters When Add or Edit button is pressed the following dialog is shown COMM DR port mapping k Eo x ISA setings PCI settings iO port 0x3F8 Yendor ID no 4 Device ID Select fram st Multi card PCI Sub port 0 S Card number 0 Card segment la Output M Include raw counter in the output Time conection m Test port Cancel This dialog lets the user specify all parameters as described above If ISA is selected then ISA setting section is available if PCI then PCI settings If PCI Vendor and Device IDs are not known press Select from list button and the program will show all PCI devices listed in the windows registry as shown below 211 Vendor Detected PCI devices 7 X ID Device ID OxLODE OxO1EB NVIDIA nForces Memory Control OxLODE OxOLEC IVICI nForces Memory Control OxLODE OxO1ED NVIDIA nForces Memory Control OxLODE OxOLEE IVILI nForcee Memory Control Ox1LODE Ox0O1EF NVIDIA nForces Memory Control Ox LODE OxO01FO NWVIDTA GeForce4 HE Integrated OxLlici OxO044E Lucent Win Modem Ox6666 0x0002 Decision PCCOM PCI amp Port Hi OxS004 0x
113. Resource Guide We will describe them here for completeness DisplayName This is the string that will appear for his device in the Service Control Manager the dialog box you get when you select Devices from the Control Panel ErrorControl Specifies the behavior of the NT loader if an error occurs while loading the device 0x0 Log error and ignore Boot process continues 0x1 Log error and display a message box 0x2 Log error and reboot with last known good configuration 0x3 Log error and fail if already using last known good configuration ImagePath Specifies the fully qualified path of the driver s image file If this value is not specified the default path is NT_root system32 Drivers DriverName sys where DriverName is the name of the driver s Services key e g wcesccdrv Start Specifies when to start the driver One of the following is specified 0x2 Indicates that the driver will be started by the Service Control Manager during system startup 0x3 Indicates a driver started on demand by the Service Control Manager You will need to start the device with the net start wcsccdrv or using the program Type Specifies the type of driver Wcsccdrv sys must use 0x1 for kernel driver WCSCMaxPorts This is the maximum number of serial ports that may be opened at the same time WCSCInBufLen This is the size of the input serial communication buffer that will be used for each opened port If you lose characters during data receptio
114. S OF DEPTH CALIBRATION ccceccscescecceccsccceccscsceccscescesescescesescescceecs 167 16 5 WHY SHOULD WE CALIBRATE neeaa karanaa adele uta a teh tia dll 167 17 THE INTERPOEA TOR isscicteccsecescccosccsascciuscedecstodcusiecendddatbesasecucsvedeaseasecsic steeeses 169 17 1 OSTR Were ne oo Cann TA CC ne OR a 169 17 1 1 Uses 6 AEs Ke I gf 016 010 a e E eee E 169 IA Oupa Capable sa aa a a cats aavea acn eta acese 170 172 MENU ORIENTED INTERPOLATOR SETUP ccccscesceccecescecceccscescecescescesescescceecs 170 7 21 Maos Ddl OT a AEE E E ee See ee Serene on Sea 171 17 2 2 TRK Dalgo a a R a 174 1725 OLIVE DAOS esa a E Naa O 175 17 2 4 SCRA D AII OD E E N 178 723 POSTON DO ar a A gail aeaayaa bos tegatana ea 180 17 2 6 SINGLE LIAO tesa Merah hou Ose ote unStrrase tesa a 183 17 3 INTERPOEA TOR OUTPUT eera r nal eae eae e eon eee en ae 185 17 4 HOW INTERPOLATOR CALCULATES SHIFTED POSITION DRAGGING ALGORITHM 189 LS TIN TERPOLAT OR EXAMPLES ctieetecsiehccu a h tig dot re lh ak a 190 17 5 1 GYRO GPS and Cable length using transverse horizontal gradiometer 190 17 5 2 ORE Trackpoint II GYRO and three Sensors e 195 Vill 17 6 INTERPOLATOR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES cccecescececcececcececcececcscecesceceseccesacees 201 18 HIGH PRECISION LAND AIRBORNE MARINE SURVEYS 203 18 1 LEGACY SOLUTION WINDOWS NT ONLY cecccceccececcececcscecescecscececescecacees 203 18 2 THE MODERN SOLUTION REAL TIME
115. Therefore to start calculation process we need to find somehow initial magnetometer position Different techniques might be employed but one of the easiest is to use an initial part of the recorded path to find direction of motion We can approximate these positions with a straight line using least squares method and count cable length back along this line This gives a reasonable estimation for the initial magnetometer position After a short time the influence of the initial position becomes negligible It should be noted that this method is not designed to work in sharp turns It is also does not take into account the depth of the Fish if Fish is deep then horizontal distance 1s less then total cable length Another problem is that the GPS normally is not mounted at the same point as the tow winch therefore the effective cable length should include the distance from the GPS to the winch 17 5 Interpolator Examples This shows a few commonly used configurations and how you might want to set up the Interpolator 17 5 1 GYRO GPS and Cable length using transverse horizontal gradiometer The system components we have in this example are a GYRO b GPS c Cable length measuring device payout indicator d 2 magnetic sensors separated by 20 meters transverse horizontal gradiometer The positions we want to output are a GPS b Tow point c Shifted point behind boat d Sensor 1 e Sensor 2 Output is to go to file Output specifica
116. These are useful when you deal with binary devices and enter your own parsing table see below After you are done with the dialog press Ok button and standard Serial Port Setup dialog appears Set appropriate port and baud rate Note that this type of device also can be used with TCP IP but not UDP and real time serial port connections New device appears in the right side of Input device configuration dialog Input Devices Configuration Available Input Devices Connected Input Devices a Speedometer SenalbinDevice dgh COM4 SO0Bd 0 Windows 0 Slots Gyro ORE TRACKPOINT Cable length Trigger AADC magnetometer orr Magnetometer TTL Event Mark Pulse 12 EM Seral Event Mark Tilt Meter Generic Triggered Device Eml Markl AMA GPS Master Clack GPSPCI Echo Sounder NMEA FINISH Properties Remove If parameters are correct green light appears on device bar You can configure now device display as usual using Configure Displays configuration menu 5 20 2 Binary hexadecimal trigger string binary fixed length data 3DM GX1 Here we create device to handle binary data of fixed length In some cases these data can only be logged and not parsed by MagLog However MagLog provides basic parsing 75 capabilities for binary data assuming that they have standard format such as 1 2 or 4 bytes integer or floating values Maglog cannot parse individual bit fields As an example here we use MicroStrain orientation sensor
117. This sensor can send out different data we will assume that we need Gyro Stabilized Euler Angles The command to produce these values is 0E00 in hexadecimal format The response of the device is 11 bytes long and has the following format In addition to these data MagLog adds 4 bytes integer value in little endian format which holds time delay between issuing the trigger and data arrival Here we will parse all these data display and log them Again to use this device go to Configure Input Devices select Generic Serial Triggered device on the left side and press Add button Fill in dialog values as it 1s shown below 76 Generic Serial Trigger x Device Alias Device Hame ayro Data type BINARY Trigger type HE CODES Trigger string DE 00 Trigger termination character decimal Trigger sample interval me i OU Max allowed number of missing triggers 20 Trigger syne mode Trigger Data Data string length fi Data termination character decimal f T Max number of fields to parse f Binary Farser Save Load Port Settings nen Alias device name Assign alias device name here You cannot change this name after device starts Data type Possible choices are ASCII TEXT or BINARY 3DM GX1 produces binary data so select BINARY Trigger type Choices are ASCII TEXT or HEX CODES Select HEX CODES because trigger string 1s binar
118. Transform calculated scale and bias in the format appropriate for G 877 and write values into G 877 memory 7 Set new format for the depth reading 8 Save settings permanently in the G 877 device s flash memory ca ie ee a If depth transducer calibration 1s accomplished using MagLog by itself step 4 requires some user intervention If the calibration 1s done via a terminal program the user will be required to implement all 8 of the above steps using coded key commands Note Due to possible low baud rate communication rates steps 1 3 and 5 8 can take several minutes Please be patient during the calibration process 53 The Calibration option is only available during the device setup which means that if you want to reset the calibration parameters that are stored in the G 877 electronics you must setup a new survey and add the G 877 device The G 877 can be the only device in the survey and you need not actually collect any data for that survey After you press the Add button in Configure Input devices dialog the following screen appears 876 886 877 magnetometer setup x Device setup parameters Alias Device Name 877 Cycle rates ho Tuning nT 50000 OOOO Where to get tuning IGFF take position from E Fort Settings Data QC parameters Maximum magnetic held zooo Minimum magnetic Held oO Sth difference limit 700000 Signal strength fio Cancel Here Pe
119. UTO ADO TRACE S00 TRACE REMOVE TRACE PROPERTIES Number of slots used by all devices 1 nk r i Number of traces used by all devices O ance Number of slots used by this device 1 Number of traces used by this device 0 From this screen you can specify the traces you would like to print and where you would like the traces to appear on the printed page Origin X cm This affects the trace origin on the page For instance most pages have a width of 19 cm If you want your slot to appear in the middle of the paper and be 2 cm wide you would use an origin setting of 9 and a width of 2 Width cm This is the slot width in centimeters Note The program will check to make sure that you don t specify slots that could be printed outside of the printed page Horizontal Scaling This specifies the full scale range of the slot Use fixed range Like display slots printer slots can be wrapped or have a fixed range If the trace is wrapped it always appears from the other side of the slot wraps if it is out of scale If the slot has a fixed range data is not plotted if its value does not fall into slot s range it is clipped This presentation can be useful for some types if data like depth and altimeter information Min Max Maximum and Minimum data ranges for a fixed slot 149 Positive axis left For some type of data for example for bottom depth it is natural to plot them with the positive axis down left when yo
120. a QC warning is generated and the device light 1s turned from green to yellow 8 difference limit If the calculated RMS 8 difference is greater than this value a QC warning is generated and device light is turned from green to yellow Signal strength If proton magnetometer signal level is less then this value a QC warning is generated and the device light is turned from green to yellow Use depth sensor to interpolate position If this box is checked and real time position interpolation is enabled during the survey see The Interpolator then the depth sensor reading can be used to mathematically reduce layback distance x relative to the cable length hypotenuse Note that proper depth sensor calibration is required for this feature to work properly 50 Upon completion of this dialog box and the following serial parameters dialog box MagLog will communicate with the magnetometer hardware to ascertain its configuration This may take as a few seconds up to as long as a few minutes depending on baud rate and other parameters The program waits for incoming data strings and then sends a command to turn the magnetometer into a terminal command mode Once in terminal mode the program issues a command to dump all hardware setting and proceeds to parse magnetometer s output Upon completion the program turns the magnetometer back into command mode The user can see this process in the following window 886 O77 messages Me
121. a easily This can be accomplished by calling the Configure printer page dialog box In playback mode this dialog has a list of all acquired data lines The buttons At the start and At the end move the beginning and end of the page to the start or stop of the selected line After the user closes Configure printer page dialog the preview window is adjusted accordingly Below is an illustration of the dialog in playback mode 142 Configure printer page Main Stop print time 8 27 18 AM D ate 5 15 03 Layout name Total page duration mir 5 Time grid interval sec 30 Lines All lines START 08 22 18 05 15 03 STOP 15 06 39 05 15 03 ll lines START Uo 22 15 05 15 05 STOP 15 06 39 05 15 05 36t pag ine 0 START 08 22 21 05 15 03 STOP 09 32 10 05 15 03 Line 1 START 09 43 27 05715703 STOP 10 07 22 05 15 03 Line 2 START 14 45 44 05 15 03 STOP 15 06 39 05 15 03 Colors arrape Outline color Text color a he Grid color o he Grid line style i Draw Geometrics Logo Line width jo Margins Left margin cm 25 Aight margin cm 2 Top margin cm fi Bottom margin cm 0 5 Min slat width cem 0 5 Use line selection box to navigate printout Select line of interest and press At the start or At the end button Watch how the program adjusts the Stop print time and Date to move to the selected place in the data When the Start printing
122. a step in trace units Only amplitudes equal to or greater than this threshold will be flagged This provides a method for removing noise It is recommended to set this value be set well above the device noise level e Time step Points are marked only if time gradient exceeds a data step time step value It allows filtering out relatively flat minimum and maximum points that are of no interest For example if the survey vessel speed is 4 knots which 1s approximately 2 meters second and the water depth is approximately 20 meters then anomalies from the sources on the sea floor have half width of about 10 meters Therefore a suitable time step will be 10m 2m s which equals 5 seconds If the time step is set to zero then the program marks all anomalies even if they are very flat e Mark GPS Mark fish position This controls where flags are placed on the map To use this feature the fish position Interpolator feature must be configured properly Flags are gathered in the user flags dialog list The user can inspect save or remove flags any time 6 1 3 Editing the Display The examples above illustrated how to add a single trace to a single slot However often you will want to add many more traces or slots to further customize your window This section explains how you can edit existing traces and slots and add new ones Configuring the traces and slots can be done from the nput Devices Configuration screen or from the
123. adients due to steel objects However because the width of the G 877 tuning is broad about plus minus 2 000 nT before any noticeable degradation in signal strength is visible and because under some low signal to noise conditions in a low field area such as off the coast of Brazil or Peru going east west the magnetometer may lose lock on one reading In this case the magnetometer will engage a signal search mode and therefore in general it is not recommended that the AutoTuning function be used under all conditions Why When the AutoTuning function is informed that the magnetometer has lost lock of the field it begins a search starting at the field value default which is set into the G 877 magnetometer not the last known good reading for instance and begins sequentially retuning to values at approximately 5 000nT above and then below the preset value in larger and larger jumps until it acquires signal or starts the process over This can take several minutes if the default field value is not set to the background field value of the area you are surveying Normally one would not expect to encounter variations exceeding 2 000 to 3 000nT even over targets such as anchors However this might occur over large 52 steel vessel at distances less than 500 ft but under those conditions losing lock due to mistuning is a valid indication of a huge magnetic anomaly 5 10 1 G 877 depth calibration Geometrics G 877 magnetometer comes with
124. age Start your survey and go to File Windows print Assuming that windows printer was not enabled during the setup Wizard a dialog with an empty page will appear on the screen The following buttons are available at the bottom of the page 1 Print setup This invokes the standard Windows printer selection and setup dialog As soon as printer is selected its settings are stored in the layout file Printer settings can be changed at any time 2 Start printing This button starts actual printing It is described in details later in this section If no printer was selected using Printer setup button or the printer does not exist then this button 1s disabled 3 lt lt and gt gt buttons These buttons move the time interval one page forward or backward For instance if current page interval is 15 00 00 15 05 00 pressing gt gt displays page between 15 05 00 15 10 00 4 Save layout The user is prompted for a file name where the layout can be saved It 1s recommended to save the layout from time to time during configuration By default the program creates a new layout file name by appending page to the survey file name For instance if user is running survey areal Survey then new layout name is created as areal Survey page 5 Load layout The user is prompted for a filename to load another layout Note that layout loaded from the file replaces the currently configured layout
125. agnetometer description You should see a screen similar to the one below 880 Settings p Lok Alias Device Mame al OK Cancel g Enable Disable Channels Signal Sth AMS Field range min max Sensor 1 3 Frono00 Frooo00 li Fronono zooo Sensor fo rono00 700000 fo fo Sensore setup oS ea Sensor 2 W Sensor P Geneon s bo ooon ooon Sensan e bo ooo ooo Geneon n I roo roon Sensori bo rono00 Foon Data format as Cll Port Settings Analog channel calibration setup cema fl Auto calibration QC range Channel Manual calibration i 2 In the section labeled Analog channel calibration setup select the sensor and channel number that you want to calibrate e g to calibrate the depth of the first sensor in the earlier example select Sensor 1 Channel Depth 3 Select Auto calibration You should then see the following dialog box 164 Calibration for sensor 1 channel Depth Depth altimeter calibration Directions Put array at a known depth and elevation above the ground Let a sensors temperature stabilize it can take about 15 min in water Then enter known depth for calibration of the depth sensor or elevation for altimeter and press Add to list Repeat at least at two gt Add new calibration point Value E Add to the list Reset av Result of calibration Scale factor none Bias
126. al Follow the same steps as above The trace name would be signal or sig unit field can be left blank In this case you don t need to express values in other units like feet therefore select Single channel as trace type Scale would be fixed positive right and limits are 500 to 2500 Appropriate grid interval is 500 Save your layout after you finished 9 3 4 3 Adding GPS positions to the plot To display boat and or fish position a mark type of graph is used This allows plotting data values equidistantly Values can be formatted into decimals degrees and minutes or degrees minutes and seconds Note that any type of data can be plotted in this way For instance 1f the user wants to plot depth on the paper each 2 centimeters it can be done using the mark plot for magnetometer depth readings The same can be done with the magnetic field It is also possible to print each data sample that arrives to the data logger If the user has a device that produces an output each 10 seconds a typical example is an event mark than all of the events can be plotted Note that because data is plotted on a channel by channel basis the user needs to set up two marks to plot both longitude and latitude numbers It is the user s responsibility to input matching plot parameters so that the GPS position appears on the paper in a consistent manner it 1s possible for instance to plot longitude each 2 centimeters an
127. al ports controlled by the COMM DRYV driver cannot be accessed by standard windows applications such as HyperTerminal for instance Only specially developed applications including MagLog can take advantage of the COMM DRYV driver COMM DRYV supports many of the serial port types including standard ISA ports located on the motherboard and some of the PCI extension cards However it may not be compatible will all types of the serial hardware To avoid incompatibility the customer can use serial extension cards produced by the same company as the driver Willie s Computer Software Co 18 2 2 Installing run time COMM DRV environment Before installing COMM DRYV driver remove the existing drivers Windows or Willie s Run time licenses for COMM DRYV are distributed by Geometrics as separate packages To install run the file wesc setup exe The installation script places the files cdrvxd32 dll into your Windows system directory C Windows System32 on most PCs and file wesccdrv sys into driver s directory C Windows System32 drivers and sets Registry settings If there are no conflicts the driver starts after the next reboot Now your can access the MagLog Configure Map COMM DRV menu You can stop and start COMM DRYV at any time using the following commands e Open a DOS prompt Type net stop wesccdrv at the prompt e Open a DOS prompt Type net start wesccdrv at the prompt Below are registry settings
128. alculate the position of the magnetic sengor based on the GPS position and system geometry in real time This could save YOU 4 lot of time because your final data will be logged in a format ready to be loaded Into many popular programs like Surber for example But you need to know about the geometry of the magnetometer array boat size GPS antenna tow winch locations the tow cable length as well as the geographical position of the survey area Be ready to enter all these values and the central UTM meridian if you want this feature enabled C No l don t want real time layback calculation Back Henst Cancel MagLog has a feature called Interpolator which allows you to calculate the real time position of the magnetic sensor based on the GPS position and the system geometry This function saves time and effort because the final data will be logged in a format ready to be loaded into many popular programs like Surfer or Geosoft Oasis for example with the position of the Fish not the GPS antenna on the boat in the file In order to use this feature you will need to know the geometry of the magnetometer array boat size GPS antenna tow winch location tow cable length as well as the geographical position of the survey area Be ready to enter all these values and the central UTM meridian if you want to enable this feature Note If your GPS is connected transmitting correct positions and you auto detected it during the G
129. ard installed into the computer Geometrics can recommend the model and performance specifications e Trigger output The pulse generated is similar to an event mark however this feature requires the installation of a special multi function card The card works as a pulse generator and MagLog can provide a logged pulse time stamp for each output pulse generated The figure below explains how MagLog handles data streams Input streams GPS serial ASCII data Magnetometer data Generic serial data Pulse data aF Analog data Pulse In Out gt PC running MagLog position computation COMI 7 Magnetometer real time COM2 COM3 Data display LPT and QC A D converter Trigger Output files INTERPOLATOR Log file Log file for COM1 Log file for COM2 Log file for COM3 Log file for pulse data Log file for analog data Log file for trigger Each output file contains unaltered original strings and their arrival times Most common data sources are logged via serial ports that may not require any additional hardware MagLog handles incoming data in the following manner e Records PC clock time when the string becomes available to the program e Logs the string into a log file if logging 1s switched ON The string is logged with its arrival date and time e Parses string converts ASCII text into digits to display its content However the parsing result is not saved and is only used temporar
130. ate the data into different slots for clearer printout The following slots are suggested e Slot 1 Plot magnetic field and overlay it with GPS position plotted as decimal degrees and minutes Plot positions each 2 cm on paper Use standard wrapped display for the field This slot should take most of the paper with about 70 of the page width e Slot 2 Plot sensor depth in range 0 15 meters Overlay with flags when they appear This information is not as important as the magnetic field but still important enough so allocate 20 of the paper width for display 130 e Slot 3 Plot signal strength This information is not as important but still needed for Quality Control Acceptable range 1s about 500 2500 for the marine cesium magnetometer so we will allocate the remaining 10 for this slot As soon as you decide how many slots are required simply move the mouse to the appropriate position and click the right button to access the context menu for space allocation Move the mouse approximately 70 from left paper border right click and select Add slot A vertical line will be added which is the border on the new slot Dragging it with the mouse will move this line Note that you cannot add a slot within a slot Move the mouse to the right into free space and repeat operation to add another slot and then repeat it again to add last slot Drag the slot borders with the mouse into their appropriate positions Note that the slot border
131. atically Are You sure you want to proceed 3 If you answer Yes MagLog proceeds to the standard Interpolator setup screens as follows Interpolator params Mags TRK UTM GRAD Positions Net M Add remove interpolator device Array configuration Magnetometer array offset m 229 Tow point GPS offsets M Use position of tow point instead of GPS Caution Position of tow point can be calculated ONLY if gyro compass is available offset m positive to starboard li 46 7 62 Y offset m positive to bow OF Cancel 4 Set up the Interpolator or change the settings in the dialog box Refer to the Interpolator section of the manual for more information After Ok is pressed 219 MagLog posts another warning giving you a chance to return to the normal playback mode MagLog re interpolation x interpolator log file will be re created rnowl f Use constant layback distance Use layback values as recorded In Line Number File Would wou like to proceed You may enter your choice of what to use for layback values for re interpolation of the data The choices are e Use constant layback as set in the Interpolator setup earlier This means that all data lines have same cable length e Use variable layback as recorded during the survey in the Line Number file To adjust those laybacks use a text editor to modify the file It is assumed that cable length
132. ative areas are plotted with the negative color 2 Longitudinal gradient L grad The only value required is L gradient limit If the absolute value of the longitudinal gradient exceeds this limit the program will plot arrows using the negative color if the gradient is below zero or with the positive color if the gradient is above zero 3 Amplitude plot This plot cannot be used simultaneously with the Longitudinal Gradient plot If either of these plot types is active when the other is selected the former type will be de selected These parameters are required for the Amplitude plot O O Average window this has the same meaning as in the Stack plot The program calculates the average and plots colored circles if the absolute value of the difference between the current data and the average exceeds max amplitude Note that if both Stack and Amplitude plot are used simultaneously they both share the same Average Window Max amplitude If the Use range for amplitude plot checkbox is not checked program starts plotting colored points if difference between average and current value exceeds this limit Use range for amplitude plot There are two modes for an Amplitude plot The first mode utilizes the Average Window and therefore does not require absolute field values The second mode allows control of the plot by setting absolute limits If Use range for amplitude plot is checked then min
133. ay update interval is the interrogation interval in milliseconds In the above example the formula 1s computed 10 times per second e Check data in range If this is checked the computed value is compared with the data minimum and maximum interval If value is not within the set range an error is generated e Use audio alarm If value is out of range an audio alarm will be generated e Annotation Text that annotates the value The text appears inside the window or in the title bar e Units Units to be displayed with the value e Digits before dot and digits after dot control the value format A format example is displayed in the Sample field e Text color Background color Error color Colors are used to print the text and background If value is out of range the background is painted with Error color Typically this error color would be red to enhance visibility e Format controls how the value is formatted The possible choices are Decimal Degrees and minutes and Degrees minutes and seconds The latter two are useful for Latitude and Longitude display 4 Advanced button is used for special settings At the time of writing it brings the following dialog Advanced display parameters x MW Only display data in the range below Data minimum E Data masimum 20 Cancel This option limits the range of the displayed values The display range
134. ber of predefined Accumulators is varies in some GR 800 s Some people may have custom firmware with more or less than 12 accumulators This number represents the number of custom channels like K potassium40 44 Configuring the DAS1700 analog to digital converter card Note This device is primarily used in specific applications where multiple analog voltages are being logged In the digital world this option is less frequently required Analog Keithley Hetrabyte Settings ee Alas Device Name ass 700 Cancel Device Number 0 3 Sampling Time z 16 channels single ended mode Select DAS 1700 and click on the ADD button The DAS 1700 Settings dialog box will appear on the screen The DAS 1700 card is shipped with Driverlinx software where you can configure the card Interrupt DMA single ended or differential mode and device number You can have up to 4 analog cards in your computer However only one card can be used at a time and it will be enabled by selecting the corresponding device number Select the card you want to use by entering a number between 0 and 3 for the device number The sampling time is entered in seconds All the analog channels will be sampled at that rate at approximately the same time 10 microsecond delay between each channel Refer to the Driverlinx manual for more information Note that if you change any parameters using the Driverlinx driver including switching from 8 chann
135. by default The magnetometer configuration is accomplished in two steps discussed in this section 1 Configure the hardware tell the magnetometer what to output 2 Configure MagLog tell the software what is coming 5 3 1 Configuring the magnetometer The hardware configuration is achieved through a screen labeled G 880 Configuration You access this screen by selecting Mag880 on the left pane of the Input Devices dialog box and then clicking on the ADD button This is the screen that allows you to setup and communicate with the magnetometer hardware denoted as Counter 1 2 3 etc below Each Larmor counter is associated with one magnetometer in the concatenated data string Example below has 5 magnetometers listed 1 to 5 with one analog channel selected for each Channel refers to the signal strength If you have used a terminal emulation program such as Windows Hyperterminal you will find it quite similar in that you can use this screen to see the data coming in on a given port adjust the baud rate and enable channels through device specific commands 34 G 880 861 823 Configuration Cycle Time 0 011 fio Fort COM Ok Data Format asa zs Current Baud Rate 3600 Cancel Hew Baud Aate 3600 id About Analog Channels On 1 2 3 Eon Counter 1 i 4109002 1 08 0208 43653 351 0215 12299 549 5916 13035 303 015 41002 Counter 2 f rl 0102 Eounter 6 Sane
136. c Computer running MagLogLite or MagLog The computer must have a parallel printer port A few pieces of wire total length about 10 ft One D size battery It will be good to have a battery holder for it 25 pin male connector to mate to the computer parallel port Double pole single throw switch to close two separate circuits at the same time Soldering iron and solder 20 2 2 Assembly We are going to make a switch controllable electromagnet to put timing pulses into the magnetometer sensor Assemble the components as shown in the figure below Connect a fairly long wire to one terminal on the battery polarity is not important and then put few loops around the magnetometer sensor Connect other end of the wire to one side of the single throw switch and then connect a wire between the other connection on the switch to the open terminal on the battery Now when you close the switch current in the loop 224 produces a magnetic field that will be measured by magnetometer and recorded by MagLog software Magnetometer channel latency test PC running maglog serial data stream to maglog Event Mark device 880 881 device Pin 25 ground SWITCH 4 close for short time Y 5 O to computer pap llel port 880 881 magnetic sensor 24 pin male connector front view 4 1 D size battery QE Typical maglog recording pulses can be positive switch open amplitude 1000 5000 nT swit
137. cE cE cE ce cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE cE eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg PE eg eg PE eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg PE eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg eg RE eg eg eg BE eg eg BE eg eg eg eg eg EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE TE TE TE TE TE Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE Te TE oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz oz LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE Le LE Le Le Le Le Le Le Le Le Le Le LE Le Le Le LE Le LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE Le LE LE LE LE LE LE Le LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE o oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE oE
138. cal wizard graphics configuration screen Display slot onentaion amp properties AA 2 125 Signal Depth Alt phe MASARA R oignal fix 250 000 i sot ie a i td Depth fix 45 312 E alt Eix 100 001 E lz 500 x Z50 0l ix 10 be iz 50 00 C Horizonatl landscape ie Vertical portrait Trace 1 color i Trace 2 color Grid color i Background color font and other Please set desirable display onentation horizontal or vertical You also can set background color annotation font and colors for traces Back Nest gt Cancel The next screen allows you to set the scale and grid parameters for the slots as well as the slot type MagLog produces an automatic display layout based on your configuration and the following rules e Magnetic field is always displayed in the wrapped mode This means that when the graph reaches the slot s border it reappears from other side of the slot e Signal strength can be displayed as in wrapped mode or in fixed mode In fixed mode slot borders have fixed values if value to be plotted is out of this range the profile simply disappears from the screen e Depth can be plotted in either mode e Ifthere are depth and altimeter sensors MagLog makes a Flying Fish plot This includes plotting of sum of depth altitude to show bottom profile and depth plotting in the same slot to show the Fish s actual vertical position in the water column Thi
139. ce This option allows you to add and customize a trace Remove Trace This removes the currently selected trace from the slot It will no longer be displayed Properties This allows you to edit the properties of the currently selected trace In the screen above no traces have been defined To add a trace click on Add Trace 6 1 2 Configuring a Trace Traces which represent profile plots of the data are also common to most displays The following dialog box allows you to choose what you would like to plot and how you would like to plot it 87 Trace Configuration Trace type f Single channel Linear combination Units for digital display nT Senzor Channel number Data Scaling A atio Linear combination Formula n Note use to denote channel number Example depth altiniter 3 4 Trace color M MinvMax auto detection Label prefis Imag Data step Time step fio Mark GPS Mark fish position Cancel The available options are Trace type MagLog can display single channels or combinations of channels If you want to plot just a single channel check Single channel If you want to plot a combination such as gradient or depth altimeter check Linear combination Units for digital display This is the suffix to be added to the digital display allowing easy recognition of the data source on the screen Sensor Channel number This represents which sensor
140. ces however it will have no effect on the logged data Plot coordinate grid If the extent of the area is less then 100 km MagLog can plot a coordinate grid for easy distance estimates The grid step value is chosen automatically based on area extent The Grid color is the same as the border color 98 Plot real time Fish position If the Interpolator device is configured MagLog can also plot the Fish position marine surveys Note that the Fish mark will disappear if it is too close to the GPS mark Plot gradient With marine transverse gradiometer systems MagLog can calculate and plot the full horizontal gradient The Interpolator device must be configured to utilize this feature Gradient plot scale If the above feature is enabled enter the Gradient Plot Scale here GPS marker icon Select a GPS marker vehicle icon to be plotted on the screen Currently four types of markers are available default compass boat plane and truck Boat plane and truck are vector icons which will show the actual heading of the vehicle The default marker is a bitmap icon and shows only North South West and East directions All icons are shown below Note Direction is shown only if GPS outputs NMEA VTG messages such as GPVTG messages or a Gyro compass is used during the survey if both Gyro compass and VTG messages are available the Gyro compass is assumed to be more accurate and will be used to show the direction Marker color Sele
141. ces outputted and the width size and position of each trace In order to configure the printer you need to specify the traces you would like to output This is done from within the Configure Displays configuration screen In the example below we will configure the Printrex or dot matrix printer to output several G 880 traces for Windows printer configuration see Using Windows printers and print drivers Display configuration Connected Input Devices GPs GPS COMS 4600 Bd 1 Window oo MAG COM1 192006d 1 Window 4 Slots Slots Traces for Display Slots Traces for Printer FINISH 147 From the Input Devices Configuration screen select S ots Traces for Printer You will see a summary of the traces your printer will output Printer Configuration defined slots AUTO ADD SLOT ADO SLOT REMOVE SLOT PAUPERTIES Number of slots used by all devices 0 FINISH Number of traces used by all devices O Number of slots used by this device 0 Number of traces used by this device 0 Auto Add Slot will generate one slot and one trace for each data field similar to the Auto Add Slot feature seen in chapter three To add a slot press Add Slot You should see the following dialog box 148 Printer Slot Configuration Ea K Defined Traces Origin crm Width cr rT Horizontal Scaling J Use fived range Max 100 Positive arte left A
142. ch closed for short time Solder pin 10 of the 25 pin male connector to one side the other pole of the switch and the other side of the switch to ground pins 18 to 25 of the 25 pin D connector are industry standard specified to be ground on printer ports Insert the connector into the printer port By closing the circuit connection between pin 10 and ground on the parallel port you will generate a computer interrupt The time of this interrupt will be recorded with the MagLog TTL marker device you must add the MagLog TTL device to Input Devices in MagLog Configuration setup This event mark and the anomaly produced by the current in the electromagnet about the sensor will demonstrate the latency in the computer software interface 20 2 3 Operation Start a MagLog survey as usual and add the TTL Event mark to the input device list Make a display for the TTL event mark screen shot is shown on figure below Make sure that device is working by closing the switch and observing the result Consult MagLog Z25 manual or contact Geometrics in case of problems You may need to reboot the computer to set the correct parallel port mode in the computer BIOS We suggest industry standard ECP Printer Port Note that Bi Directional Printer Port mode will not work properly Due to contact bounce you may see two interrupts recorded one when the switch is closed and other when it is opened HL Maglog NT C Surveys simple latency S5urvey Fil
143. click to access context menu alternatively you can just double click on the slot then select Traces and follow the same was as for magnetic field till you get to Configure trace dialog The following settings are specific for depth graph e Assign name depth and units m or f If you like to plot depth in feet see below e Select the trace type as Single channel if you are plotting depth in meters or Composite formula if you are plotting it in feet e Select the device alias as MAG and channel as depth e For display in feet create a formula by pressing the Add button The formula should read as 1 MAG depth Modify this by hand to 3 28 MAG depth 3 28 is the scale factor to convert meters into feet 135 e Select scaling type as Fixed positive left enter lower and upper limits as 0 and 15 or whatever is appropriate e To establish the depth grid check Draw coordinate grid and set appropriate grid interval Check Draw labels Set Y offset as 100 mm it would be approximately in the middle of the page label height as 2 mm and digits after dot as 0 if you are plotting the grid as whole meters or feet e Specify line types and colors as you like Now press OK note that new graphic entity appeared in the list and press OK one more type Your depth graph is now configured Signal strength configuration is very similar Use slot 3 to plot sign
144. continue You should now see the 880 Settings screen 229 all xl mo poo on a 7 e senal Stat _ p aa illz By default this is set to use a serial port To read data from a data file select Data File and press File Name under Data File Setup to select a file name 230 The data sampling rate is how often you will read data from the file That is to say to simulate a magnetometer sending data ten times per second you should use a data sampling rate of 100 ms This option has a minimum time of 20 ms You could also use the internal sampling rate This will look in the file find out how often data was logged using the internal time stamps and read data from the file at the same rate When you have selected your data file press OK and fill out the rest of your G 880 parameters as desired 21 3 Outputting status information for QC purposes This feature 1s typically used as a remote quality control device For instance let us say that we wish to remotely monitor the performance of the system via a RS 232 radio link The MagLog system may be acquiring data at 100 or 50 or 10 times per second but we cannot transmit all this data over a radio link as we are bandwidth limited But let us say that we want to periodically SAMPLE the data being stored in order to verify proper operation and data integrity In this case we set up an internal Multimedia Timer a function inside Window
145. ct color for boat plane or truck icons Color for default icon is fixed Position Sets the color for the dots that make up the GPS track plot Logged pos Sets the color for the dots that make up the GPS track plot when the software was logging to disk Background Sets the background color for the GPS window Border Sets the color of the border around the plot User Map Sets the color of the imported User Map if applicable Gradient Sets the color of the plotted gradient lines see GRAD Dialog in the INTERPOLATOR setup An example of real time gradient plot is shown below 99 Typical real time gradient plot e Survey area Color of the defined survey area if defined The survey area will be plotted as a filled polygon A light color for example gray 1s recommended Note If Automatic Logging is enabled logging will commence when boat OR when magnetometer fish enters the survey area user selectable e Load User Map from File Click this box if you want to load a User Map NOTE If you select this option you must also specify the User Map file including full path in the provided entry field e Annotation font Font to be used to plot border annotations on the GPS map Note that flag annotations are always plotted with system font Note Normally MagLog expects GPS input to be in geographical latitude and longitude coordinates It will do an automatic conversion to meters UTM on the scree
146. d interpolate formula to step i sec wv se auto step Scales Scaling type Wrapped Data scale fioo Lower limit E Upper lirit fioo M Label wraps M Draw coordinate grid Grid interval fio i praw ond labels Grid label offset mm i 0 Label height mm E Grid label digits after dot U F Appearance Trace color ij Line style m aa 0 Grid coor fj Line style A complete description of the dialog controls Trace name This is the trace name as it appears in the page legend The name should be unique Appropriate names are mag depth etc Data units Optional display of data units to be plotted in the legend and on the graph Trace type There are two choices Single channel or Composite trace formula The first is used if a simple device reading will be plotted The second provides the ability to combine different channels into one waterfall plot A typical example is plotting total water depth for a magnetometer equipped with both altimeter and depth sensor In this case it is desirable to plot sum of these two values to track sea floor topography A composite formula can be used to linearly combine data from any devices regardless of their sample rate If the devices are sampling at different rates the data is interpolated to the same time interval before plotting the trace Device Alias Lists all alias devices available in the program plus special devices
147. d latitude each 1 centimeter probably not what user wanted Below is an example how boat GPS position can be plotted Move mouse into slot 1 area and right click Select Traces and press Add Alternatively you can just double click on the slot In any case select Marks type not Trace type The following dialog appears 136 Configure markers Basic Markers name Lon Data units Markers type Single channel Device alias GPs Device channel Lon Formula ada interpolate formula to step i sec fw se auto step Appearance Marker coo Horizontal position mrm 2 Type ay Size mm li Digits after dot iG Text Hight mrm 2 Text Width mm 18 Minimun vertical separation between labels 20 mm Print all data event marks mode Print time Marker format lien tear aller For this particular example set all fields exactly as in this snapshot Note that the first part of the dialog box is the same as for trace plot The definition of the fields is as follows Markers name This name appears in the page legend The name should be unique not used elsewhere Appropriate names are Lon if longitude is plotted or Lat for latitude Data units Data units optional Leave this blank for GPS positions Markers type There are two choices Single channel or Composite trace formula The first is used if a simple device readi
148. d oO Sth difference limit 700000 Signal strength fic Cancel Alias device name MagLog will use the device name you enter Cycle rate s Sample rate in seconds cycle time for the magnetometer The minimum allowable value is 0 5s two readings per second MagLog will configure the G 886 G 877 hardware to cycle at this rate Tuning nT Expected background magnetic field value for magnetometer hardware tuning MagLog will configure the magnetometer hardware to this tuning value Where to get tuning Depending on your selection the program can obtain G 877 tuning values from different sources There are four options Have user enter appropriate tuning value in the field above Select auto tuning mode for the 877 magnetometer This 1s not recommended in most cases see explanation below Have user enter his approximate position on Earth latitude and longitude and use the internal IGRF model to calculate Earth s magnetic field at that point For more information about the IGRF model see for instance AGA Working Group V 8 1995 International Geomagnetic Reference Field 1995 revision Submitted to EOS Trans Am Geophys Un Geophysics geophys J Int J Geomag Geoelectr Phys Earth Planet Int and others You also can check out http www ngdc noaa gov 80 seg potfld magmodel shtml Have MagLog take the current position from the attached GPS device if GPS 1s available and calculate the tuning value using
149. d you cannot alter this choice without reinitializing the survey setup e Serial port number COM1 COM2 TCP IP the last selection in the list is TCP IP This allows MagLog to connect to the server which supports point to point TCP IP connections e Baud rate if a serial port is selected or a host name and port number if TCP IP is selected In the latter case the Host is the name or IP address of the data source examples geom geometrics com or 206 86 214 130 or localhost Port is defined as the TCP port for the data source for example 14001 for Lantronix serial data to TCP converter Please consult your device manual for proper host and port values e Data sampling rate if data is being read from a file in milliseconds Note that MagLog may not keep up with this rate precisely this depends on system load and other factors If you are using this feature to playback your data there might be slight discrepancies introduced between GPS positions and magnetometer readings e File name to retrieve and from which to read data e Sample Rate There is an option that allows the program to compute the sample rate from the data in the file In this case the file must have date time stamps the typical case when data is logged with MagLog 30 e Serial filter This is list of prefixes to filter out unwanted serial strings When MagLog sees a string that starts with one of these pre
150. d partition using FAT NTFS or leaving it alone Any formatting will remove all data so it 1s advised to select the option Leave the current file system intact no changes Note If you do select formatting the type of file system will affect what kinds of things you can do with your computer FAT is compatible with Windows 95 DOS and Windows 98 However it is not as efficient in managing hard disk space as the NTFS system NTFS is not compatible with Windows 95 DOS and Windows 98 It is beneficial because it allows you to keep one hard drive rather than having to make smaller partitions to make the best use of your space 14 After you have made your selection Windows will ask for the installation directory A good default is WINNT 15 You may be asked again if you want to completely overwrite your previous installation If you do press ENTER NOTE If you are not sure sometimes it is beneficial to create a new Windows NT installation by using a different directory name and then deleting the old installation when you are sure that your new one will work 16 You are given the option to perform an exhaustive examination of your hard disk This usually takes a long time and sometimes yields useful information It 1s usually safe to skip it by pressing ESC 16 You should now see setup copy files to your hard disk It should do this for about five minutes After this has completed you will be prompted to remove
151. description of the output into a separate ASCII file The file can be viewed in notepad and printed if needed e Configure GGA output Position fields can be output in GGA format In this case each GGA string occupies a separate string GGA format compiles with NMEA specification By pressing this button the following dialog is called Latitude SHIFT LAT bal Longitude SHIFT_LON bi Output prefis 2 characters ML Cancel Check Enable GGA output to make MagLog output position information in GGA form Then Latitude and Longitude should be selected accordingly Output prefix 2 characters appears immediately after the leading in GGA string in this example selecting ML generates an Interpolator output string starting with MLGGA Here is an example of Interpolator output with settings as indicated in dialog boxes above MAGL 20295 746 79 DEPTH1 164 043 72 MLGGA 3751 9731040 N 12227 0080880 w 2 27 000 M M 0000 69 MAG1 19882 415 7A DEPTH1 164 043 72 MLGGA 3751 9719040 N 12227 0092940 w 2 27 000 M M 0000 6D MAG1 19564 913 74 DEPTH1 164 043 72 MLGGA 3751 9708900 N 12227 0103140 w 2 27 000 M M 0000 61 MAG1 19183 721 76 DEPTH1 164 043 72 Note that only 4 fields from GGA message are included in the string latitude longitude GPS QC and height 188 17 4 How Interpolator calculates shifted position Dragging algorithm In this section we prov
152. desired host This mode allows passing through a network gateway and broadcasting to the host of another network The name of the host or its IP address 1s required e UDP broadcast connection to any host on the local network Please consult your network administrator for an unoccupied TCP port number We provide an example below of how data can be received on another workstation when MagLog is working in server mode Server This field must be filled in with a valid host address or IP It is needed only when MagLog is operating in TCP client mode or sends UDP packets to a specific host When MagLog is working in server mode e Assume the computer with MagLog running has an IP address 198 162 0 1 and the port number is set to 14001 and TCP transmission 1s enabled The computer is connected to the local network e On another computer start the command shell in a DOS window by going to Start Run CMD ok and type the command telnet 198 162 0 1 14001 You should see the transmitted Interpolator data coming on the screen e Another way of accomplishing the link is use the Windows Hyperterminal program that is part of Windows installation Start Hyperterminal and select Connect using as TCP IP Winsock Then type Host address as 198 162 0 1 and Port number as 14001 You should see data coming on the screen e At present MagLog allows connection to one client This means that if a connection has been established
153. does not change within the survey line 5 The existing Interpolator file af any is saved by MagLog with an extension BAK However if the BAK file already exists the user must pick a different name this is the case if the re interpolation process is used a second time In this case a file save prompt appears Save jni E3 06 22 01 a 32 Survey 980 MAG E s2 Survey FLAGS sz oume G PS GP5 B zA Survie logintoz bt al a 2 Survey Gyralompass gyro sz Survey INT ERPOLATOR INT se Survey IN TERPOLATOR CORARECTEDAINT rs I File name s2 Survey INTERPO LATORINT BAK Save Save as type Cancel T Open as read only 220 6 Finally MagLog begins the re interpolation process To increase interpolation speed all display windows are automatically closed The user can observe the playback dialog as a progress indicator Maglog playback 10 52 32 10 53 42 it C 17 mse Eme a tine 1 i OG 22 01 feo sec z 6 2201 gal em a The Slider bar shows the progress for the current line and Line to display shows current line number The only control enabled in this dialog is the Stop button 7 When the user presses Stop or when MagLog reaches the end of the survey the following message is posted Re interpoltion i complete Would wou like to restart playback Answering Yes causes MagLog to automatically re load the survey in playback mod
154. dth of 29cm for data plots You need a wide printer to use this mode 152 Parallel Port specify the printer parallel port Address Port address for the parallel port 0x378 and 0x278 are defaults for LPT1 and LPT2 respectively Consult your computer or parallel extension card manual for correct values Print Here you are given a list of possible positions you can print GPS latitude and longitude This will print the GPS coordinates in geographical coordinates Layback geographical This will print a calculated layback position in geographical latitude longitude coordinates Layback UTM This will print the calculated layback position in UTM coordinates 1 ORE target geographical This will print the position of the ORE target in geographical coordinates 1 ORE target UTM This will print the position of the ORE target in UTM coordinates Print event fix shot number only This option is available if TTL or Serial event device is available Print Lat Lon as Latitude and longitude can be printed as decimal degrees degrees and minutes or degrees minutes and seconds If Interpolator is not running only choices 1 and 6 are available At column 0 11 This specifies the column where the position and event number will be printed At least every This specifies how often the position will be printed given in centimeters of paper fed through the printer Print on event marks only This option is available only
155. e Remove al Do not apply filter to the logged data ATTENTION You must terminate surrey and start it again to use a new filter Cancel To replace a device talker ID press Remove all button then type new prefix in Prefix field and press Add Note that the new prefix can only be in the form xxDBT where xx is your talker ID Then press Ok close Serial Setup and device dialog boxes and restart the survey for the new setting to take effect 5 19 TTL Pulse devices in MagLog Pulse devices refers to external time tags or event marks Please do not confuse this type of device with the previous PULSE 12 EM device MagLog has ability to log the time of TTL pulse arrival that come to pin 10 of the printer parallel port The recommended voltage is 5 volts with a duration of not less then 1 Ms This pulse generates a parallel port interrupt and MagLog will then obtain the time of the interrupt event Interrupt pulses can be treated with Geometrics parallel port custom drivers under Windows NT only or with general purposes driver DRV X28 under Windows NT and WIN9x The Geometrics parallel port driver has an advantage over DRV X28 because it provides high accuracy time stamps lms or less However as noted its usage is limited to the NT platform only The Win9x DRVX28 driver gives less accuracy in the 20 ms range This is no doubt sufficient for slow moving surveys but perhaps not for airborne type su
156. e Answering No will simply close the survey In this case to replay it with the new Interpolator file reload the survey in playback mode Re interpolation allows the user to see the fish position and additional types of superimposed data plotting on the track plots for instance gradient plot If the user cancels re interpolation the following message appears maglog Re interpoltion has been cancelled Would wou like to restart playback ES Ho MagLog restores the original Interpolator device file Again answering Yes re loads survey in playback mode answering No simply closes the survey 221 20 Survey QC checks 20 1 Layback and Latency Test using a Natural In field Source This test allows the user to estimate the overall timing and positional accuracies of the system including the magnetometer or other sensor positions 1 e attached to the tow cable for marine surveys mounted on the vehicle for land surveys or the stinger for airborne surveys the GPS antenna position connected to the computer via serial link and taking into account inherent delays in the computer hardware and software system One major reason for these inaccuracies stems from the timing delays present in current Windows operating systems thus affecting the accuracy of the time stamp placed in the file when the data arrived compared to the actual time the reading was acquired This affects positioning in real time using the
157. e menus A few examples will be given later in this chapter to illustrate the concepts The Interpolator can be accessed through the configuration screen No Interpolator information will be available until a magnetometer and GPS are installed 170 iid MagLog Test GPS_txt GPS gps OF Xx File Configure Yiew Output Devices Window Help Printer Interpolator layback Bie Meieesty Interpolator output KF Test 880 txt 880 880 or x 45 0029214 45 Status Field Signal Depth AltimeteField 2 Signal 2Gradient 250 Ua ees 32 000 64 666 64 666 64 666 64 666 64 666 64 666 45 66606756 45 2163332 You can configure the Interpolator by selecting the Configuration menu followed by Output Devices and then Interpolator This will allow you to access several tabbed dialog boxes discussed below 17 2 1 Mags Dialog 171 interpolator params a Mags TRK UTM Positions Net Array configuration Magnetometer array offset m 100 Tow point GPS offsets T Use position of tow point instead of GPS Caution Position of tow point can be calculated ONLY if gyro compass i available i Offset m positive to starboard fo fo Y offset m positive to prow cal This dialog box allows you to set several attributes about the magnetometer Add Remove Interpolator Device This check box enables the Interpolator There will be no output or calculat
158. e Output Devices Help Input Devices Displays configuration Comment Alki Device buffers dd new Hardware andfor change settings You will then see the following dialog box 2l Input Devices Configuration Available Input Devices Connected Input Devices G 858 Mag 88079817523 Mag B224 Generic Seral Device GFS GRS00 GRO DAS 1 700 EM 31 EM 61 GPS PPS pulse Speedometer Gyro ORE TRACKPOINT Cable length Trigger FINISH Properties Remove This is the Input Devices Configuration dialog box Itis the central dialog box for adding or changing those devices to be logged From this dialog add devices of your choice After adding the devices you will then specify how each data source is to be plotted on the screen or dot matrix printer using the Input devices Configure displays menu iid Maglog NT C MagLogData test1 Survey File view Configure Output Devices Help Input Devices Displays configuration comment Device buffers The following dialog box will be displayed 28 Display configuration Connected Input Devices Slots Traces for Display Slots Traces for Printer FINISH In this dialog a list of all connected devices is displayed only one in this particular screen shot To configure a device display select the device from the list and press Slot Traces for display button To configure a dot matrix printer output not for the Windows printer pre
159. e View Configure Display Setting Print Settings Window Help E 880 mag COM7 9600 Bd CX Gps Gps come 9600 Ba Short 200a 41393 2 41649 2 O 0016761 0 0017485 EE DER Mark 200s 1 5 Eaka zy 5 2005 64 64 27 Make these tests in a relatively quiet magnetic area and ensure that magnetometer is not in dead zone i e that it is getting steady data when mounted in a fixed position and the impulse electromagnet windings are not energized When you close the switch for short period of time as quick as possible less then 1 second you should observe spikes in the magnetic field profile Spikes can be negative or positive Typical amplitude would be around 5000 nT When you see that magnetometer reacts to the switch closure you are ready to perform the test Simply start MagLog data logging and click the switch a few times back and forth with an interval of about 20 seconds Collect 10 events or so 20 2 4 Analysis Two MagLog log files will be used in the analysis magnetometer log file and TTL log file Both files have recorded the time when the magnetic reading arrived or when the event mark occurred Depending on what you named your survey the files may be named 226 simple latency Survey 880 mag and simple latency Survey EventMark TTL Inspect the magnetometer log file with an ASCII editor You will see records similar to the following Alesse oO 0901 Or LOZU LOZ Ooa 132 726 S ALIS gB 604 0035 SF 107037
160. e has an additional feature called Keep Auto configuring It is available from the Page menu as a checkable menu item If checked the program will reconfigure the page layout using the screen each time a new page is to be printed All manual changes in the page layout are lost if the Keep Auto configuring menu is checked For example if the user has changed the screen layout removed some slots changed scale on others etc between the time when page 1 was printed and page 2 1s about to be printed page 2 will not yet have the changes they will appear on page 3 9 3 3 Setting up slots to draw the data manually After page duration is set and required time grid is established the user may allocate slots or slices of the page space to draw the data No data can be drawn outside the slot but any number of data lines can be drawn in any slot The number of slots and their widths depends on the number of devices the user wants to plot and is user defined For a typical simple magnetic survey with one magnetometer and one GPS device a user might want to print the following information Draw magnetic field as a linear graphs in different scales Draw depth as graph Draw magnetometer signal strength for QC purposes Plot GPS positions as degrees and minutes Plot user determined flags during the survey eae ce a os All this information could be drawn using only one slot however logically itis better to separ
161. e if card and or drivers are not installed you will see an error message Cannot load Master Clock GPSPCI driver In this case close MagLog and troubleshoot the GPSPCI installation e If card and driver are working the following device setup dialog will appear Master Clock GPSPCI configuration x Master Clock card information MCA driver mer driver MCA Hardware signature GPSPCI Correction intormatiorn Alias device name Interrogation interwal z fi Cancel Here MCR driver and MCR hardware signature are read from the card The user should assign a device alias and Interrogation interval Check the box Use Master Clock to correct time Once started the Master Clock device outputs the following channels 1 Correction between Performance Counter clock and UTC time per second in microseconds typical value is about 50 us 2 GPS status 1 1f GPSPCI has GPS data 0 if not in this case internal GPSPCI clock is used 214 3 Correction in milliseconds Accumulated correction for Performance Counter clock This value will grow while the survey is running A typical value could be up to 3000 ms per 12 hours operation 4 Used to correct MagLog time If user checked the box above this value is 1 5 Navigational GPS latency milliseconds If a GPS device is used for the survey the Master Clock device computes its latency on the fly this is GPS latency not GPSPCI latency
162. e logging system must have two main features 1 The ability to log data arrival times with acceptable time accuracy 2 The ability to synchronize the time of the logging system with GPS supplied UTC time If this condition is met GPS UTC time stamps can be used directly and therefore GPS latency can be eliminated altogether To resolve both these issues special software and hardware must be used as described below 18 2 1 Accurate time stamping with COMM DRV driver To provide the minimum delay between data arrival and time stamping a special serial port driver can be used This driver gets time stamps as soon as data is available to the operating system and is not dependent upon any particular application running on the operating system GPS latency even for moderately priced GPS receivers is not constant and can reach up to 0 5 seconds or more For marine survey performed at 4 knots it would mean inherited position error of 1 meter or up to 25 meters for airborne surveys 205 At present Willie s Computer Software Co provides a good solution with their COMM DRYV software driver This driver takes over the serial ports and handles input output operations in place of the standard windows driver It also provides a data time stamping feature that is proven to be accurate to one millisecond or less Unfortunately the COMM DRYV software is not compatible with the standard windows API or with some PC hardware This implies that seri
163. e the proper Central Meridian We don t specify northing or easting here because we want the final output coordinates to be true coordinates rather than adjusted coordinates We also leave Geographical output unchecked because we want the output in UTM rather than recomputed into geographical latitude longitude coordinates 4 Positions Dialog 199 Here we input the magnetometer positions that we want to track We have three sensors so we need to enter three positions Additionally since there is an ORE Trackpoint II we can easily calculate the position of the acoustic target so this is the best reference point to use The final position screen should look like the following Interpolator params x Mags TRK UTM Positions Net Magnetometer s position Target 00 180 00 Target 10 00 180 00 Target 20 00 180 00 Remove OF Cancel Here we specify the sensor distances from the acoustic target Because sensors are behind acoustic target azimuth must be 180 5 Net Dialog network connection setup Here we enable Ethernet transmission by checking the box Enable Ethernet transmission We then need to specify the receiver IP address and the port number Your system administrator should know these values One way of logging these data at a remote location is to use MagLog or they can be displayed using a terminal emulation program with TCP IP capability
164. e you may proceed It is primarily used for bookkeeping or record annotation These fields are not actual configuration settings they are notes about the survey for future reference It is not necessary to fill in every field and the contents will not affect future performance Click OK to proceed This dialog box can be switched off if field Info Dialog is set to 0 in Maglog ini file see below Next you will be presented with the following choices Start Hew Survey What configuration do you want to use Cancel C Same hardware setting as last survey No preconfigured Hardware New hardware or Problem with existing settings You may base the new survey on any of the following settings e Same hardware setting as last survey This will copy the hardware settings from the most recent survey that you have run This would be the option to choose if you wish to start a new survey with the same hardware settings as previously used e Hardware setting of another survey This will copy the settings of a different survey than the last one used If you choose this you will get a dialog box allowing you to specify the name of the survey from which to copy the hardware settings e No pre configured hardware Use this option if you want to start the hardware configuration from scratch or if there is no previous survey Also use this choice if you have updated the version of MagLog and the new version is not compatible with p
165. ected to ORE Settings for above values given different configurations Configuration Enable Serial GYRO X Y offsets ORE GYRO connected to NO X 0 Y 0 Offsets ORE tow point specified should be specified internally in ORE relative to tow point ORE GYRO not connected YES X and Y offsets are given to ORE tow point specified with respect to tow point ORE GYRO connected to X 0 Y 0 Offsets ORE should be specified internally in ORE ORE GYRO is not X and Y offsets are given connected to ORE but is with respect to GPS connected to PC MUST HAVE GYRO TO WORK Positive X is assumed to point in the direction of the starboard side of the ship Positive Y points in direction of the bow or front of the ship Enable median filtering This option enables a filter that will output the median value of a history of ORE readings The median value is found from taking a series of readings arranging them in numerical order and then selecting the middle one This is useful for removing spikes Filter Size This specifies the number of readings that are used when calculating the median 17 2 3 UTM Dialog This dialog allows you to set up parameters relating to the UTM coordinate transformation The only case in which you will not need this dialog is when the GPS outputs UTM coordinates directly and you want your output in UTM coordinates In all other cases it needs to be set up with the correct parameters 175
166. ed in the slot If wrapped is selected the data graph wraps when slot border is reached This is typical for magnetic field plots It allows seeing all the data but makes it more difficult to judge data value Fixed implies fixed scale for the whole slot For instance it would be logical for depth data to plot it between 0 and 15 meters assuming 15 meters is maximum fish depth If the data is out of slot range no graph will be plotted There are two options for fixed type positive right and positive left Second is more appropriate for the depth graphs to see that at bigger depths the curve goes down when page is rotated counterclockwise Data scale It is available for wrapped traces only This is total span of the slot in data units Label wraps It is available for wrapped traces only If this is checked then the data value is plotted when the trace wraps Lower limit and Upper limit These are only enabled for fixed scale traces For instance for the depth it makes sense to set lower limit as 0 and upper limit as 15 Draw coordinate grid Enables coordinate grid drawing for the trace Note that 1f multiple traces are plotted in one slot then each trace can have its own coordinate grid plotted which will make the data display hard to read Therefore user must select trace scales and coordinate grid intervals carefully Grid interval Coordinate grid interval Example the magnetic field is plotted with a o
167. ed with the MagLog wizard a set of pre defined layouts is used These layouts are shipped with MagLog software and after installation can be found in the same folder as maglog exe program default location is C Program Files Geometrics New layouts can be easily added to this default set Follow the following steps to add a new layout e Create a new test survey with your typical hardware using MagLog wizard Start the survey and re configure the layout to match your needs 236 e Inthe Configure printer page dialog see Configuring MagLog page layout press the Layout name button A dialog with layout description will appear e Add additional text to the printer layout description do not erase the existing text to distinguish your new layout e Save the layout into a page file and move this file into the MagLog installation folder typically C Program Files Geometrics e The next time you use the MagLog wizard you will see two available layouts on the windows printer configuration page the standard one and your newly created layout 21 6 Configuring marine magnetometers CM201CFG configuration program Starting with version 2 84 MagLog places a CM201CFG program icon as separate item on the computer desktop CMZ01CFt This program has a separate value for modern Geometrics magnetometers all firmware revisions except X x A a CM201CFG can be
168. eded Press Ok A new entity will appear in the Data to draw for slot dialog box Close the dialog with the Ok button Note that annotation appears on the bottom of slot 1 To see actual data you may need to move page forward with gt gt button Let s plot the magnetometer data scaled by 10 Using the duplicate button can help Select the newly created trace in the Data to draw dialog and press Duplicate The program creates the new trace with exactly the same parameters except the name mag1 in this example Select mag1 and press Edit button Adjust the parameters of the trace set name as mag10 scale as 1000 and disable grid drawing grid for the previous slot still can be used but with step 100 instead of 10 Select a different trace color to distinguish between traces Press Ok Note that there are two entities in the list now Press Ok one more time and check page preview There should be two annotations in different colors at the bottom of slot 1 At this point you might save your work in a page layout file Press the Save layout button A default file name is created as the survey file name plus a page extension 9 3 4 2 Adding depth and signal graphs Configuring the depth plot is very similar to configuring magnetic field plot Slot 2 is used in this example for a depth plot Move the mouse cursor into slot 2 area and right
169. elect the appropriate units under Survey units drop box Units can be changed any time during the survey using Configure Units for this survey menu item Surrey file name E x Please enter the name of your survey file IF you need to change a directory use the Browser button Please note that this file should not esist Maglog will not overwrite this kind of file for you Contents of areas The survey file i a binary file which stores all of the settings of pour survey devices port displays etc As soon as it is created it can be used to continue a suwe or create a new one with the same settings areal R en umber maglog l POR survey file Our Held Tiles Survey file name C MagLogD atasurvey Survey Survie units meters Back Hest gt Cancel 4 2 Configuring GPS and its display The next screen will allow you to configure the GPS It will work best if the GPS is connected to one of your serial ports during setup This is because MagLog automatically computes the central meridian for your area from the GPS position The central meridian is used for conversion to UTM coordinates meters when real time interpolation 1s employed computation of actual sensor position for each reading see below If the GPS is connected press Auto set communication parameters and MagLog will scan your serial ports to find the GPS port and its baud rate It may take a few minutes
170. elect which fields to output their order and to format each field as needed for instance Latitude Longitude can be formatted as degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds A variety of options 1s available 1 include field names which can be re assigned by the user into the stream 2 add prefix postfix 3 output each field on separate line multi string output 4 decimate data output each 10th or so string to reduce network overhead 5 select separators space tab or comma and 6 append checksum to each string or not Position information can be sent out in the form of NMEA GGA messages to be accepted by another MagLog copy or other navigational software Below is the Interpolator output configuration dialog 185 Configure interpolator output a E x Available fields Selected output fields WAGI gt MAGT DEPTH1 gt DEPTH SIGNAL DEPTH MAGS DATE Add gt gt TIME GPS_LON GPS_LA amp AT SHIFT LOM SHIFT LAT ATSAGETS AUX POINTS LON ALS CPI Edit Remove field Include field names in the output IM Add checksum to the output Output format Mult string Dutput field separator SPACE Output prefix E Output postfis Decimate data for output li Configure GGA output Cancel Save protocol file The following controls are available Available fields list all Interpolator output fields by their internal names By selecting the field and pressing the Add
171. elements scaled marks lines and line sets GIS ArcInfo shape files can be converted into this format also but cannot be used to define the survey area This option is available from the main MagLog menu and should be used before starting any survey File View Configure Output Devices Start New Survey Ctrl h Continue Existing Survey Ctrl C Help Survey Wizard Create survey plan User Flags Play back survey 1 test Survey Start Logging atris Stop Logging atri tE Terminate Survey Ctrl 7 Exit Program Select Create survey plan option under File menu This will bring MagLog into the survey plan preparation mode In this mode a maximized GPS window is displayed however program cannot accept GPS information at this time The user should insert flags on this map in the appropriate places using the GPS display context menu Prepare a set of ArcInfo shape files 1f this information 1s available After all information is ready select Add plan elements as it is shown below you can call this dialog as many times as you need Note All features described in this article are also available when the actual survey is running However in this case to update GPS display map the file must be re loaded using GPS PLOT CONFIGURATION dialog 103 ioii MEES hid MagLog NT Survey plan C7 Eile Configure View Output Devices Window Help Start Mew Survey Go
172. els differential to 16 channel single ended you must reboot your computer If no card is plugged in your computer or an invalid IRQ and DMA have been set you will get the following error Al Open DrrverLINX Driver x Error initializing DriverLih 5 8 Configuring a Generic serial device 45 To log and display customer supplied serial devices MagLog provides a Generic Serial Device interface Devices that can be logged with this interface must comply with the following specifications e Device output s one string of characters per reading The string should have a unique termination character The user is asked to provide the decimal value of the string termination character e ASCII strings are preferred but binary data also can be recorded with some limitations e To be displayed by the MagLog program the string should have a fixed number of numerical fields separated with non numerical characters The number of fields should not vary between readings To use the Generic Serial Device go to Configure Input devices and select Generic Serial Device from the list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear Generic Serial Device Settings x Alias Device Hame Max string length OK gen 2000 Cancel Mars number of field Termination char to parse Secu Decimal Port Settings T Binary or BCD data The user must enter Alias Device
173. emember the parameters are actually stored in the G 877 fish electronics Here is an example 877 depth calibration Reading Value Pred Difference 1 2340456 0 00 00 0 00 2 4095 00 40 00 40 00 s O Results scale 0 022797 bias 55 5002 004 G 877 setup values depth scale factor 5083 depth bias sign 0 add l subtract 1 depth bias 868 depth decimals 5 The last four strings represent values that are suitable for G 877 calibration in terminal mode These are provided in case you need to reenter them into the G 877 using terminal emulation Now the program will set the new values into the G 877 magnetometer by converting the depth output format and saving the results into the flash memory When all these steps are complete the following message will appear Goo G77 messages Messages polarize voltage dist tuning display positi tuning display format status display positi status display format Postamble gt mee Input voltage display format temperature display position U snone l lst 2nd temperature display format a ete 2s ERAR gabei tel oap dis pT j st nd etc 1 Depth calibration complete ete 0 ee tic etal ok RHR Cancel 57 At this point MagLog proceeds with the normal G 877 setup process If you are not going to use this survey for actual data acquisition you may terminate it at this time 5 10 2 G 877 Terminal Calibration Log I n thi
174. ements before using the Windows print feature e The Windows Printer driver prints in discrete pages even if dot matrix printer with Windows driver is used This means that the user needs to determine the proper page duration before configuring the printout Typical values range between 1 minute per page to 15 minutes and longer Very short pages may eventually jam the printer system queue depending on the computer system and printer performance The recommended value is 5 minutes per page e There should be enough data in the program buffer s to fill in complete page Therefore buffer sizes need to be extended to accommodate enough data If the buffer size is not long enough only a part of the page will be covered with data To change the buffer size s start MagLog but do not start your survey and go to Configure Device buffers Make sure buffer size in device samples has sufficient size to cover the whole Printer page For example if you plan to print 10 minutes per page 600 seconds and operate 880 magnetometer at 10Hz you need to set minimum buffer length as 600x10 6000 samples Because of the windows spooling time this buffer size needs to be increased by 20 therefore total recommended size would be 7200 samples Note that very big buffers increase memory consumption and may slow overall system performance e During actual survey pages can be printed continuously one discrete page after another For instance if the page duratio
175. ensors Lag also controls how often gradient lines are plotted on the map For example if Lag is 10 meters each new line is plotted 10 meters from the previous one The figure below illustrates how the full gradient is calculated 179 distance lag 17 2 5 Positions Dialog Full horizontal gradient calculation Transverse gradient att Sensor 1 longitudinal gradient based on lag distance Average transverse gradient Transverse gradient at t Sensor 1 Sensor 2 PE ene mee collie This dialog box allows you to specify additional position points you would like calculated It will also allow you to specify what points of reference you want to use to calculate these positions Interpolator params Mags TRK UTM Positions Met Magnetometer s position Type Cancel You can add a new position by pressing Add You should then see the following dialog box Set parameters for mag 1 Distance m lo Azimuth degree fo Cancel Type Specify the type of reference point you are using The available options are a GPS position of the GPS b Shifted Position that takes the cable length and other options specified in the Mag screen This is usually used for a horizontal gradiometer when you magnetometers located horizontally away from the center of the boat c Target acoustic target calculated from the ORE Distance Horizontal distance from re
176. er Value equal to 0 and press Reset av button Wait about a minute to allow device to acquire some data Then press Add to the list Note that new string appears in the list at the bottom of the dialog box Lower the magnetometer down the water column to a predetermined depth by marking the cable beforehand Make sure that the Current value is changing if current value is not changing it may mean that your G 877 does not have the depth transducer installed or that the sensor or associated electronics is malfunctioning contact Customer Service immediately Measure the actual depth by pre marking the cable or using a rope Enter the actual depth in the Value field Press button Reset av and wait for about a minute to allow device to acquire new data Then press Add to the list Now the program has two depth points and can calculate depth and bias parameters for initial calibration Lower magnetometer to another depth and repeat Compare predicted and measured values in the list to make sure that they are consistent If maximum depth 56 in the list is less than 20 meters the results may not be optimal and a deeper calibration point should be used e You can delete a point in the list by right clicking on it and selecting delete Press OK accept calibration if you are satisfied with the results MagLog will prompt you to save the calibration data into a file This file is for your reference only and is not used by MagLog r
177. er operation unless tests show that there are no false interrupts being generated This could be a case when another parallel port is used to log trigger pulse time Synchronize logging with trigger If a trigger 1s used with 822A Super Counters and the data is logged via serial ports it is desirable that the trigger and serial log files match on a per string basis This means that the first trigger string should match the first serial string To ensure this Synchronize logging with trigger box should be checked There is no display for Trigger device The Log file has the keyword TRIG in each string and time stamp Note IF real time interval correction and synchronize logging with trigger options are set you MUST restart the survey for these options to take effect 5 19 4 Configuring Speedometer device wheel tick This device requires the CTM 10 or CTM 05 A multifunction card to be installed into computer Consult the Hardware configuration section and card manual on installation procedures The device is available under Windows NT only and key sys driver must be properly loaded and running If these conditions are met you can go to Configure Input devices and select Trigger from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear Speedometer setup Alias Device Mame Folling interval m 100 Scale Device counter Counter 1 Cancel
178. er position for each magnetometer reading there will be a series of positions output MagLog is able to output several types of positions depending on available hardware 1 Reference Point This is a point e g geodetic coordinate that is assumed to be on the ship It is the starting point for most calculations and is present in all files generated The user 1s able to specify the type of reference point output a GPS raw antenna point the actual reading from the GPS b Tow point another point still assumed to be on the ship a fixed offset away from the GPS More discussion is given at the end of this chapter 2 Shifted Point This is a point that is at a fixed but not necessarily rigid offset relative to the ship The two types of shifted points available are a Simple shifted point This assumes a constant cable length e g L and it uses the past movements of the ship to extrapolate the likely point a distance L behind the ship b Shifted point using variable cable length This allows a variable cable length and works similarly to a 169 3 Acoustic Target Position This is only available when the ORE Trackpoint is used The two types of position points that are output depend upon the type of GYRO device used a MagLog s calculation of acoustic target position This is used when the ORE Trackpoint II does not have a GYRO connected Note that there must always be aGYRO connected in order for the ORE to work
179. ess Add Slot In this example we will name the new slot Two Fields and we will press Add Trace twice We will use the first trace to plot channel 1 and the second trace to plot channel 5 The final window should appear similar to the screen below 92 Display Configuration defined slots FILED Vert Scalingfin s 120 000 Hrz Scaling 1 000 0 Traces Scaling 1 000 2 Traces AUTO ADD SLOT IO REMOVE SLOT PROPERTIES WINDOW SETUP EQUALIZE SLOTS FINISH The resulting Display Configuration screen seen when exiting the slot configuration window should appear similar to the screen shown below When you press Finish and exit out of the configuration screens the final window generated for the G 880 display should appear similar to the screen below BE Test 880 txt 880 880 Two Fields 93 Note Here we have manipulated the scale factors to fit the data input In this case the first slot Field has a horizontal scale of 32 and the second slot Two Fields has a horizontal scale of 64 You can also see that channel one is graphed on both slots but the second channel has an additional plot channel 5 present To change the slot orientation you can press the Window setup button It displays the following dialog Slot window properties Orientation Prrtrait Slot border color Ei Auto center time min 0 ta disable E J User same time scale for all slats
180. etup or by switches Consult your manuals Note MagLog will not work with PCI parallel port extension cards It is recommended that you use the Digital Display mode for the TTL event mark device display If a TTL Mark device is present it will change the log files of other devices MagLog records the current value of the event counter s before recording the date and time stamps 5 19 2 Configuring PPS GPS device Go to Configure Input devices and select GPS PPS pulse from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog Press Add and next configuration dialog appears PPS device settings Alias Device Hame FPS I Real time interval correction Expected interval li ogg Tolerance ms 5 Cancel Alias Device Name User inputs name of device Real time interval correction One of the problems with the original PPS pulse design was due to its short duration 1 ms This kind of signal may or may not produce a PC interrupt Thus without special treatment hardware or software half of the pulses will be lost To solve this problem MagLog uses real time interval correction Let s assume the program gets a pulse at a 1000 ms relative time interval If the expected interval is 1000 ms and the tolerance is set to 5 ms the program will be looking for the next pulse between 1995 and 2005 ms Ifthe pulse arrives during this interval the program accepts it If there is no pulse between 1995 and 2005 the progra
181. eview mode To give the user a sense for the actual dimensions of the survey data the program displays the mouse position when the left button 1s depressed The program shows the distance from the left page border distance from left slot border or no slot if pressed outside allocated slot and distance from the top of the plotting area All distances are in millimeters Some page parameters can be adjusted using right click and context menu The following functions are available e Add slot Adds new slot if initiated in free area Disabled in already defined slot e Delete slot Removes current slot if pressed inside the slot The rest of slots move left to occupy freed up area Disabled if clicked outside the slot e Traces Calls dialog for trace and marker configuration if clicked inside the slot The same dialog is called if the user double clicks inside the slot Disabled if called in slot free area 139 Set Flag This allows the user to set a flag in the current position of the page This menu item is grayed out if you attempt to set a flag outside of the defined slot This function is for use mainly in playback mode It creates a user flag in synchronization with survey time of the survey event not at the current playback time These flags will appear correctly on the preview window and printer page Flags that are set on MagLog slots during playback have the time of the playback and therefore do not appear on the print preview
182. eywell device for both pressure and temperature To accomplish this follow this procedure 1 Connect the Honeywell device to two serial ports 2 Setup a Binary trigger device on port 1 Use a hexadecimal trigger string as 2A303050310D2A3030543 10D This includes both triggers for pressure and temperature along with cartridge returns 3 Set up a filter on port 1 as 01CP Uncheck the box so the filter is applied to the logged data as well 4 Set up a generic serial device not trigger on port 2 Setup a serial filter as 01CT Uncheck the box so the filter is applied to the logged data as well Now the two data streams are clearly separated and one log file holds only pressure and other only temperature At present it is not possible to share a serial port used by the binary trigger This 1s why two physical serial ports are required 6 Configuring Input Devices for Display Once devices have been selected for input you must now specify how you wish the information to be displayed on the screen MagLog creates one window for each device You can then add slots and traces to the windows to graph details that you want to see Terminology 8 1 Window An independent sizeable object that you can use to display information about your device Only one is allowed per device Slot A subdivision of a window You can have as many slots as you want and can use each slot to have as many traces as you want Trace A graph o
183. f scale 100 and a grid interval of 10 Coordinate lines will divide the slot into10 intervals Draw grid labels This is available for traces with fixed scale only In this case a coordinate grid can be annotated It is desirable to have coordinate lines marked for example as 2m 4m 6m etc Grid labels are enabled if this box 1s checked Grid label Y offset mm For grid labels this value controls where the labels appear on the page It is counted in millimeters from the top of the slot Label height mm Allows user to specify height of the grid label Grid label digits after dot Selects grid label format 134 Appearance This group of controls allows selecting colors for the trace and its coordinate grid as well as line styles and width Width is specified in millimeters however the screen preview will be only updated for integer values like 0 1 etc Minimum graph step mm To reduce printer overhead the program will not try to plot points separated by a distance on paper less than this value For instance 1f the page duration is 10 minutes and the magnetometer is sampling at 10 Hz the program would need to plot a line of 10 60 10 6000 points to fill the page This number can be greatly reduced if indistinguishable points are not plotted To finalize the setup assign a trace name mag set device and channel names select single channel type and appropriate scale and grid intervals Adjust line styles as ne
184. f ASCII time stamp Note that L 1Vva f the data arr not time o time stamp represent trigger time 79 5 20 3 Honeywell PPT Precision Pressure Transducer device Setup for the Honeywell PPT device can be accomplished using the Generic Serial Trigger which 1s available in versions 3 01b and later Typical settings for the Honeywell PPT to output pressure at 10 Hz rate is shown below Generic Serial Trigger x Device Alias Device Name ppt Data type Asc TEST Trigger type ASCII TEXT Trigger string 00r1 Trigger termination character decimal Ii 3 Trigger sample interval ms i OU Mas allowed number of missing triggers 20 Trigger syne mode Trigger Data Data string length i z Data termination character decimal fi 3 Mas number of feld to parse 2 Binary Parser JAVE Load Port Settings Cancel 80 Note that only channel 2 has information which needs to be displayed because the data message contains two fields as shown below 201CP 1012 4 where 01 represents the device address 1 CP represents the type of data and 1012 4 represents the value of the measurement which is decoded by MagLog as channel 2 Also please note that a trigger device uses Windows multimedia timer This means a You cannot have too many of these devices about 10 b It affects your ability to use mini windows There is a possibility to use a single Hon
185. f one variable This section will show how to configure the most commonly used displays and will give some generic features common to all displays To configure the display for a device use Configure Displays configuration menu You need to select the device from the list of Connected Input Devices Then click on Slots Traces for display 6 1 The Display Following is a description how to configure a device display The G 880 magnetometer 1s used as an example but the methods can be applied to all other devices with the exception of the GPS and devices that have no visual display e g trigger pulses Display configuration Connected Input Devices eel mag COM 192006d 0 Windows 0 Slots GPS GPS COMs 9600 Bd 0 Windows Slots Traces for Display Slots Traces for Printer FINISH To configure the G 880 display you need to select the G 880 magnetometer and click on Slots Traces for Display 82 You will get the following dialog box Display Configuration defined slots Mage Vert Scalingiin SU 000 Are Scaling 512 000 2 Traces Sige Wert Scalinglin 50 000 Hrz Scaling 2048 000 2 Traces Depth Yer Scalinglin 50 000 Hrz Scaling 32 000 2 Traces Alt Vert Scalinglin sf 50 000 Hrz Scaling 16 000 2 Traces Grad Vert Scalinglin 50 000 Hrz Scaling 126 000 1 Trace AUTO 400 SLOT ADE SLUT REMOVE SLOT i WINDOW SETUP FINISH This window allows you to see the
186. ference point to desired position point Azimuth angle Angle between direction of boat travel or cable and line connecting GPS or Fish position depending upon Type choice to desired point The positive direction 1s clockwise Picture below illustrates coordinates definition 181 GPS Tow winch Position of main ORE hydrophone to be calculated with GPS reference point Ss amp gt Acoustic Target or shifted point Acoustic shifted point J XA X 4 target as reference A a MAG2 D MAG1 MAG3 Four positions are to be calculated at time of every magnetometer sample ORE main hydrophone position on the star side of the boat and positions for three magnetometers To calculate first point GPS is taken as reference point to calculate magnetometer positions acoustic target or shifted point serves as reference For example if distance between acoustic target and MAG3 1s 10 meters specify distance as 10 and azimuth as 180 182 In general the positions will be specified differently depending on the type of reference point you are using Reference Point Azimuth Angle GPS Horizontal distance from Angle between direction of GPS to desired position boat and the point to be point calculated Shifted Point Horizontal distance from Angle between direction of shifted point to desired cable and the point to be position point calculated Target Distance from target If not equal 180 program uses sequence
187. fication zoom to your area You may need to activate the NumLock key to access 26 the and keys on some computer keyboards Use the arrow keys to shift or translate the location map horizontally or vertically The Magnetometer profile display window begins with a default layout It can be altered manually if desired see manual configuration section below Make this window active with a mouse click and then use the arrow keys to navigate between the slots and change the data FULL SCALE values inside each slot 5 Manual Configuration of Input Devices The following procedures will show you how to manually configure input devices This includes magnetometers global positioning systems gyro s tracking systems and others For each device that you want to configure you need to have a unique communications port assigned to that device This can be physical serial port or TCP IP port MagLog supports logging and data export transmission over these communication links If your current survey is based on hardware settings from a previous survey or you opened an existing survey you will not need to start the hardware configuration procedure from the beginning You will simply need to edit or revise the existing settings The following section assumes you are initializing a new hardware configuration Select Configure Input Devices from the menu iid Maglog NT C MagLogData test1 Survey File wiew Configur
188. fixes it filters it out no logging no parsing One of the possible applications for this 1s to connect one physical device with multi string output to two serial ports thus creating two MagLog logical devices and set proper filters for both of them such that one string is received in each port e Change port lt gt file next start Ifthe user wants to change the input data source from serial port to data file or vise versa this box should be checked It signals MagLog to switch the data source from serial port to data file or the reverse the next time the survey is started For example the user has acquired some data and now he or she wishes to use these files for training purposes To reconnect MagLog from the serial port to the file check this box and terminate the survey Then restart the survey MagLog will try to read data from the files and there will be an opportunity to enter the file name Another case is when the user is preparing for a field trip He or she can create a survey to be used later for the actual acquisition The created survey includes all the devices with their display configurations etc and it works with all files To use this survey as a real survey check this box for all serial devices and terminate survey Then restart it If the serial port information is not correct port and baud rate adjust it Note Care must be taken during actual survey procedures not to begin logging a pre captured o
189. fl WinSack biy Computer HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SS YSTEMS Curentlontrolseth Sernvices wd Consult with your PC manual to find out which IRQ and port number your parallel port is using If you are using ISA parallel port extension card PCI extension won t work then you can set these parameters by means of switches on the card Then go with regedit and set correct parameters in the registry DataPort and IrqLevel Note that regedit is using hexadecimal format by default If you set IrqLevel gt 15 decimal wdj and kei drivers won t react to interrupts However wdj still can be used to obtain time stamps For CTM 10 card IRQ level and port are set with switches on the card Write down these parameters and set them into the Registry Avoid conflicting with other devices Here are the most important pins of the main CTM 10 connect Consult CTM 10 manual for other connectors Pulse outputs counter 1 ATOUTI1 35 GROUND 38 counter 2 ATOUT2 33 GROUND 32 counter 3 ATOUTS3 31 GROUND 32 counter 4 ATOUT4 30 GROUND 32 counter 5 ATOUTS 28 GROUND 26 Counter inputs counter 1 ACIN1 23 GROUND 26 counter 2 ACIN2 2 22 GROUND 20 counter 3 ACIN3 25 GROUND 26 counter 4 ACIN4 29 GROUND 32 counter 5 ACINS 36 GROUND 38 If you are using counter for pulse generation you cannot use the same counter for wheel tick input 246 22 5 2 Windows 95 98 Above drivers don t work under Windows 9x and to log Event Mar
190. flag can be set manually by the user or automatically by the anomaly detection part of the MagLog program MagLog tries to center the flag on the page and therefore the user should not expect printing to start immediately after a flag is set For example 1f the page duration is 10 minutes and a flag set at present time the program waits another 5 minutes to acquire data for a complete page display Flags received during these 5 minutes do not trigger additional pages and will also be printed on the page The preview dialog is closed and the user cannot re configure layout while the print on flag option is active Calling File windows print again cancels print on flag option The main window status bar field Printing indicates the windows printer system state at each moment It can have the following values e Printing OFF No real time printout e Print in xx minutes Continuous printout enabled and next page is going to be printed in xx minutes e Print on Flag the introduction of a flag manual or automatic can be used as a trigger to start printing 9 5 Printing MagLog pages in playback mode Printing in playback mode is different from printing during real time survey because data has already been acquired Therefore there is no need to wait for each page to complete and all pages can be printed at once at the user s request The print preview window has the ability to navigate to any part of the dat
191. for trace with fixed scale in this example used for signal R stands from right It means that maximum value 2500 in this example ison the right side of the slot 500 00 2500 00 is slot range Trace values out of this range are not plotted in this example absence ofthe data would mean that magnetometer is out of operating range Flag example Horizontal line goes across the slot Text above the line is flag name text below is position of the flag in this case formatted in degrees and decimal minutes 126 Page legends and annotations 9 3 Configuring MagLog page layout This section covers step by step layout configuration assuming a survey using a magnetometer and a GPS Windows printing is available under the File Windows print menu in either survey or playback mode After File Windows print is selected from the configuration menu a Windows preview pane appears on the screen This print preview shows the graph as it will be printed on the paper The window is resizable and allows you to define the print layout interactively dragging slot borders etc Control of the window is accomplished using control buttons and the context menu The context menu is available by right clicking the mouse when the cursor is inside the white page By default each time you choose File Windows print the program selects a print interval based on the current time and page duration 9 3 1 Setting up printer and p
192. ftware key or dongle and check the Use parallel printer box to enable printing Then select the correct printer type Note that if the printer type is incorrectly selected unrecognizable characters will be printed You also can configure the following printer options e Select chart speed e If layback calculation is enabled print GPS position in decimal formal or layback calculated position actual sensor position in Lat Long e Select the position on the chart where text is to be printed 24 MagLog creates an automatic printer layout based on your hardware configuration This layout can be altered later manually if you wish At the beginning of the chart MagLog prints a short legend wherein it explains the printer layout Printer setup dialog Printer setup x IF you plan to plot data during acquisition check Use parallel printer and select the correct printer type The printer should be connected to port LPT 1 MagLog is able to print to ESCYP Epson most matris printers comply with this standard and Printres printers If your printer is not compatible you will nat get consistent output and will have to stop printing You also may set the offset where you want to print GFS MAG position Printer parameters M Use parallel printer Chart Speed 0 001 2 mm s 05 Printer Epson generic 24dot i Print GPS latitude amp lonatitude At column 0 14 fo At least every em ho o TO TP a a Pe a ae ee aT
193. gs to accurately reflect the depth measured 168 17 The Interpolator MagLog is able to do real time calculations of multiple sensor positions The processed data is then made available via either Ethernet e g ship network with IP address and or a serial connection and stored into a file The following chapter explains the capabilities of the Interpolator and the settings needed to make it work 17 1 Overview 17 1 1 Uses of the Interpolator The Interpolator was made to solve the problem of computing and storing real time magnetometer positions A typical survey has several different devices some of which give positional information and others that give measurement values only The surveyor usually wants to make a spatial map of the magnitude of the measurement and the position where the measurement was taken Since the device generating measurements usually doesn t output position information e g G 880 we need a way of using the GPS information to calculate the actual position of the magnetometer sensor Additionally there are devices such as the ORE Trackpoint II and the GYRO compass that can be used to obtain even more accurate positions of the magnetometer sensors Usually the calculations of the magnetometer positions are done after the survey is finished using additional software such as MagMap2000 To provide a real time solution MagLog has an Interpolator that is used for doing real time calculations of the magnetomet
194. gurations screen exited successfully you will see the dialog box that reflects the port settings you previously selected Otherwise port settings will default to COM1 You also have the option to set various quality control values that will generate useful warning messages during survey operations The quality control options are a Signal Set the minimum signal value you would like to allow during the survey Good data 1s characterized by a strong signal and data with signals lower than 500 are suspect A good range for this value is probably somewhere between 600 and 1200 If the signal drops below the set value during the survey you will get a warning message b 8 RMS This is the magnetic field quality control value that gives a measure of how much the field is varying The 8 RMS value is generated by computing successive differences of 10 readings A higher RMS is indicative of a noisy field and you should specify the highest value you will tolerate e g 2nT 39 c Min and Max Field This will allow you to specify minimum and maximum fields you expect to occur during normal survey This could be set so that you will be alerted to the existence of a large anomaly Note that under trace properties you can set up an anomaly detection parameter rate of change of field that is separate from this min max value Analog channel calibration setup control group is disabled if device has just been added To access this gr
195. gure Input devices and select EM6 from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and this configuration dialog box will appear EM 61 Settings Ea Alas Device Hame O K fem Cancel Number of Sensors Sampling Time Po Battery Warring A Fort Settings i Alias device name Assign alias device name here Number of Sensors Total number of electromagnetic sensors Sampling Time s Trigger interval in seconds Battery Warning V Voltage level to generate low battery warning 5 13 Configuring EM61 Mark II device This device provides an interface to the newer EM61 Mark II system It has a similar setup to the EM61 but there are some significant differences in data acquisition Like the EM61 this device needs to be triggered with a serial character therefore both the transmit and receive wires of the serial port must be wired The original MagLog interface design attempted to match the time when a trigger character was sent with the time of the data arrival However at high cycle rates around 100 ms per sample the device cannot respond within the sample interval period This means that if one trigger character was sent at 0 ms and the next at 100 ms then at 200 ms etc data from the 0 ms trigger can arrive during 0 100 ms interval or 100 200ms interval or even in 200 300 ms If for some reason the EM61 Mark II does not respond to the trigger character for instance 1f the trigger
196. h less dependant on overall system load A special multifunctional card from Keithley Metrobyte 203 allows generation of the trigger pulse for the magnetometer Each pulse induces a PC interrupt The time of that interrupt can be logged in a manner that is similar to the process for the parallel port interrupt These drivers are available for Windows NT only Here we discuss the overall acquisition and processing steps necessary to employ this triggering scheme see schematic below l GPS system with PPS option Approximately half a second ahead of each pulse the GPS generates a serial string with the pulse s UTC time Then the pulse itself is generated Serial strings are logged with MagLog Generic Serial Device and the time of the pulse arrival is recorded with a driver By matching these two pulse streams it is possible to recalculate PC time into UTC time with a very high accuracy about Ims GPS also sends its normal navigation message However the PC time stamp appended by MagLog 1s not used for calculation and interpolation of positions instead the UTC time is taken from message s body The Keithley CTM 10 card is started in pulse generator mode Each pulse induces an internal PC interrupt and the time of this interrupt is logged with a special driver The pulse also triggers the magnetometer Then a serial string with the magnetic field value is sent from the magnetometer to the computer and logged with MagLog G 822A device set
197. has an ability to take the delays into account if the user explicitly enters the sum of delays The delay is assumed to be constant e Windows family OS has its own delays when processing serial port transmissions This means that when data physically arrives at the serial port it does not become available to the program immediately The system itself has to spend some time to present data to the rest of the software This depends on the speed of the computer this may vary from 10 ms average to 20 or even 50 ms It should be noted that this delay is not constant and depends on the processor load We have seen it vary between 2 ms to 500 ms Because of these delays normal MagLog operational mode does not provide the very best spatial accuracy possible In simple terms a solution to this problem is to use UTC GPS time instead of PC time and the time of the data arrival should be logged without delays 18 1 Legacy solution Windows NT only Our solution is based on a process of external magnetometer triggering that has the ability to log the time of a specially generated trigger pulse event with almost no delay and to also log the UTC GPS strings together with a corresponding GPS PPS pulse per second UTC synchronized option available on some GPS systems Geometrics has developed a special Windows NT driver that allows logging the time of the pulse arrival based using a parallel port interrupt The accuracy of such a time stamp is about 1 ms and muc
198. he 880 internal counter modules CM 201 or CM 221 for special purposes like yaw pitch and roll sensors or radar altimeter for small airborne systems using analog altitude output The calibration of analog channels will be discussed later in this manual see Depth Analog channel calibration When you are done press OK to continue on with your setup or Cancel to cancel any changes you made 40 Note Once this screen has been exited the only way to change the port settings is to delete the magnetometer setup and start over 5 4 Configuring the GPS The GPS can be configured by highlighting the selection GPS located in the left window of the Input Devices Configuration dialog box Input Devices Configuration Available Input Devices Connected Input Devices Mag G 858 aol mag COMTASZ00Bd 0 Windows 0 Slots Mag 85807 8817 523 Mag B224 Generic Seral Device GFS PPS pulse Speedometer Gyro ORE TRACKPOINT Cable length Trigger FINISH Properties The following dialog box will appear GPS Settings Ea Device Alias Device Name GPS Quality control Differential GP S fis required Number of satellites not less jo OF Cancel This dialog box allows you to select a device name configure the port settings much like that done with the magnetometer and set quality control factors 4 Click on Port Settings to specify the communications port selection The
199. he Wizard but there is some chance that you may encounter configuration problems in the future and have to reconfigure the system when real data is present The next screen is the wizard Welcome screen Welcome to Magnetic survey Wizard Welcome to Geometics Marne Magnetic Survey Wizard The following screens will guide vou through the creation of Your Survey Itis best if you have the Hardware 80 867 magnetometer and GPS recerer connected to the PC and running However if you do not have it available now you shill can to configure a new F 4 Back Cancel All Wizard screens have a short help file associated with them duplicated in this document Next you must specify a survey file name It is recommended that you press the Browse button and select an appropriate folder and name don t place your survey files in the same folder where maglog exe executable files reside but in another folder such as C DATA SURVEY 1 Please note that the program requires a unique and new file name for the survey file MagLog will not allow you to overwrite previous survey files The survey file is a binary file that stores all of the settings of your survey devices ports display configurations etc As soon as it is created it can be used to continue a survey or create a new one with the same settings 11 It is possible at this time to specify distance units to be used in the survey Meters or feet are currently available S
200. his type of device has limitation similar to other MagLog devices it can not handle multi telegram messages In addition you also can not share port used for triggered device 5 20 1 ASCII trigger ASCII output DGH1141 This device defers from Generic Serial Device only by the trigger It needs trigger to be issued by host computer to produce reading The simplest trigger format is 1RD with following cartridge return decimal code 13 Program will run timer at user selectable interval and issue the triggers Device produces ASCII strings terminated with cartridge return symbol decimal 13 To use this device go to Configure Input Devices select Generic Serial Triggered device on the left side and press Add button The following dialog appears 73 Generic Serial Trigger x Device Alas Device Name dgh Data type as Cll TEXT Trigger type ASCII TEXT Trigger string 31RD Trigger termination character decimal f 3 Trigger sample interval me i O00 Mas allowed number of missing triggers 20 iW Trigger syne mode Trigger Data Data string length fi 5 Data termination character decimal i J Max number of fields to parse li Binary Parser Save Load Port Settings nen Here the following parameters have to be filled in Alias device name Assign alias device name here You cannot change this name after device starts Data type Possible choices are ASCII TEXT or
201. ibly mounted in different places At present version 2 88 only digital display mini windows are available but there is a plan to develop different types in the future Below is an example of such a window inside and outside of its parent The smaller window is inside the parent i ik TA 7 1 Digital display mini window The digital display mini window is essentially a timer device that gets called at user defined intervals Once called it can obtain the latest values of any device channel and compute a linear combination of them The result is displayed in a user selectable format This feature can be useful when data of different devices are to be combined for the purposes of display A typical example is combining a boat fathometer reading with magnetometer depth The difference between these two indicates approximate fish elevation above the sea floor and can supply crucial information to avoid collision with the sea floor To create a digital mini window use the following steps 1 With any MagLog display window highlighted select the Configure menu on the top menu bar Select Mini window option A new blank white rectangle window 115 will appear in the left top corner of the display window Drag this window to appropriate place and resize it as desired 2 Right click on the mini window to bring up the context menu and select Edit The following dialog will appear Select data to display x
202. ide a brief description of the method used to calculate the position of the Fish being dragged behind a boat Let s consider an object magnetometer Fish being dragged behind the boat with a constant and known tow cable length The boat is equipped with a GPS receiver and therefore its position is available The task 1s to provide a reasonable approximation for the magnetometer Fish position based on GPS readings and cable length The picture below illustrates the Dragging Algorithm solution Solution is approximate and does not take into account 3 D configuration depth and physical effects like friction or side currents Nevertheless it provides a reasonable model for fish behavior even 1f the ship makes a turn We assume that we know position of the ship A and the magnetometer N at time tp and we know the cable length At time t we know the position of the ship B but do not know the position of the Fish M To find it we draw a straight line NB between old 189 magnetometer position N and new ship position B Then we count the cable length from B towards N A new point M is the estimated position of the magnetometer sensor at time t It can happen that distance BM is greater then BN if ship does a sharp turn In this case magnetometer position not changed literally it would sink The method explained above assumes that the magnetometer sensor position at time to 1s known but it is unknown at the start of the line
203. ill still be registered but you lose the option of quick registration if you need to re install the software for any reason e Now exit the program and start it again You can see that word lt UNREGITERED gt is gone 3 Getting Started Click on the Windows Start Button to start the program Select Programs and then Geometrics You will see and be able to select MagLog Or click on the MagLog icon located on the Desktop F MMaglog You should immediately see the main MagLog screen File View Configure Output Devices Help EE ee eee EE eee eee You are ready to begin initializing your survey 3 1 Starting a new survey You can begin a new survey by selecting Start New Survey from the file menu File wiew Configure Output Devices Help Skart Mew Survey Ckrl N Continue Existing Survey Cbrl c Survey Wizard Create survey plan User Flags Play back survey 1 usb test Survey Start Logging atts Stop Logging CErI E Terminate Survey Ctrl T Exit Program Then enter the name of your survey in the field File name of the Save As dialog box Navigate to your data folder and click on the Save button H 1 eer Er airborne survey 1 LES C ee i D Suver Fie tsuei l o a Next you will see the following survey information dialog box Surrey information The information in this dialog box must be filled out befor
204. ily for display purposes e Display the string content as digits or graphs as defined in setup MagLog also performs real time QC monitoring of the data For instance if the value of the incoming data is outside of a preset range assigned by the user during setup the green running light for that device upper left hand corner turns yellow and an alarm may be generated which could include audio warnings verbal alert of cause of alarm and pop up dialog boxes showing the cause of the condition Should the data transmission from a device stop all together the running light turns red and additional verbal and visual alarms are initiated In simple terms MagLog logs data with date and time of arrival and then displays the data while performing real time Quality Control functions 2 First Time Start up of MagLog After installation is compete two new icons will be present on the computer desktop to launch MagLog program and Ed CMZO1CFG to launch CM201CFG configuration program used to re configure 880 882 magnetometers Click on the Windows Start Button and select Programs and then Geometrics You will be able to select MagLog Or double click on the MagLog icon located on the desktop MagLog starts and displays the following dialog box User and Company names 2 3 x Mag L Thank vou for using Geometics Maglog software o Ha Since this is the first time you are unnng the program i please enter
205. in 14 Width 4 Scale 2 000 Value 2 0 vie Reale OT Les ae ree EE aera baa Rae a aa lata tae e R rs e200 a7 5a ae er ao i a000 am 53 29 7960 DERAS pida A eLA ELEL i 13106152 zigi gt asen arose mi O eo ASOT Og i al ese viik Win abers i i oF poe SOF ioF iif k ZE aa ia I ioTis2 a FMEA RARER eta 7 5660 a7 sa h2 idoo ad OCF 15 07 42 lS oF Toi 15 07 32 9 6340 7739 2 deoo ap eee 154 10 4 Changing line number during Survey Select Configure from the menu then Line Number You should see the following dialog box that will allow you to change the line number Line Number Configuration Current Line Humber lo Cancel The line number is used and recorded with the data while logging Itis automatically incremented by one when you stop logging You can change the line number only when you are not logging data The line number is restricted to a range between 0 and 10000 155 11 The Survey This section describes a typical survey screen the menus available and many of the operations you can do from within MagLog 11 1 The Main Screen Once you have defined all your hardware display and printer settings you will have a screen similar to the screen below i mag A H i compass EFR i INT 6 66 Kb 6 68 Kb 8 66 Kb 6 66 Kb 6 68 Kb MT Haglog HT F data maglog_
206. increment the line number automatically Unless you specify a different survey name all new data will be appended to the old data files You may set the line number when logging is stopped to any number in the Configure Line number menu 12 1 Auto logging feature If survey an area polygon is defined it is possible to start logging automatically when the GPS or fish enters the survey area please see Preparing a Survey plan file To use this feature a GPS window should exist and be active Select Configure Start auto logging menu item as it shown on the screen shot below 159 iol x WMaglog NT C MagLogData gps Survey File Configure View Output Devices Window Help 1 Input Devices Displays configuration Line Mumber Units For this survey i Comment Alt Z E toe e GRID LOOOf Display GP S On track plots Check for positions GPS ma In this dialog check Start logging data after entering survey area and select the appropriate Check for positions GPS or Fish to enable auto logging feature Position selection allows the program to start logging if GPS or magnetometer fish enters the survey area if the INTERPOLATOR is not being used in the survey only GPS position can be selected for the autologging feature because the fish position is not calculated Upon entering of the survey area logging is started automatically After leaving the survey area logging is sto
207. ions if this is not checked When this is checked you should see a circle with labeled INT at the top of the screen with the rest of your devices Magnetometer array offset This is used in the calculation of a point behind the vessel It will mean different things for different configurations A brief summary is given below for a sample value of 100m that is input The ORE has no effect on any of the settings in the MAGS dialog However to try to eliminate confusion we have included the ORE in the list of Devices Present All distances and points are calculated from the GPS ORE GYRO Cable Length Will calculate a shifted point equal to the length of the cable measured 100 meters behind the boat with respect to GPS ORE is ignored meters behind the GPS GYRO Cable Length Will calculate a shifted point equal to the length of the cable measured 100 m behind the boat It is recommended to specify a tow point and put 0 for this value If you don t specify a tow point but still 172 specify 0 for this value you will a shifted point that is calculated using a value equal to the distance to the GPS minus the distance to the point of attachment of the cable length indicator GYRO Will calculate a shifted point equal to 100 meters behind the boat Cable Length Will calculate shifted point equal to length of cable measured 100 meters behind the boat NONE Will calculate shifted point equal to 100
208. ires in place e Configure the magnetometer as needed and store configuration as power up default using Store configuration button valid for CM221 counters only installed routinely after July 2003 e Power down and disconnect magnetometer To prevent MagLog from attempts to reconfigure magnetometer each time survey is started set DO NOT CONFIGURE 880 1 In maglog ini file make sure MagLog is not running when you modify the file e Now the magnetometer can be powered down and re connected to the tow cable 22 Hardware Configuration This section explains the basic installation procedure for the hardware on your machine In case of a complete system failure you will need to install each of these in sequence For less catastrophic situations you can refer to the appropriate section 22 1 Windows NT Installation NOTE The following information is offered for example only It contains references to specific computer hardware and accessories that may or may not be used by your system In general MagLog and MagLogLite will perform well on any Windows platform including Windows 98 I8SE ME NT 4 0 2000 etc You will need a 3 each 1 44 MB Windows NT Workstation setup disks bundled with your Windows software b Your Windows NT Workstation CD ROM disk c Your Certificate of Authenticity found with your Windows NT manual To begin 1 Insert Setup disk 1 into your 1 44 floppy drive Then reboot your computer You should see
209. is dialog box provides print selection options The options are Current page only Program prints the page currently being viewed on the screen Preview dialog is not closed and user can select another page using gt gt and lt lt buttons All available pages Prints all pages that can have any data Page duration and internal program buffers define number of pages Program does not close preview dialog Last pages Program prints last N pages where the user sets N If 1 is set only current page is printed Program does not close preview dialog Continuous printout This choice is available only in real time survey Starting from the present time the program starts printing pages continuously according to selected page duration Note Printer device could be Adobe Acrobat or other PDF maker such that the printing is actually printing to file for later screen review The program closes preview dialog warning is posted to the user When continuous printing is running the page cannot be re configured Calling File Windows print function results in the warning that continuous printout is running If the user proceeds the continuous printout function is canceled and the preview dialog is displayed again If the survey is closed while the 141 printout 1s running the program prints the last page This final page may not have a complete data set Print on flag This option initiates printing each time a flag 1s set a
210. is particular page was made for a simple magnetic survey that included a cesium magnetometer and GPS devices The magnetometer is equipped with a depth sensor calibrated in meters The page has a legend area on the top and annotations on the bottom Total duration of the page in this example 1s 5 minutes Time labels are printed on the right side of the page at a user selectable interval 30 seconds in this example Print Start and Stop times logging state line number and survey file name are plotted on top of the page The page number automatically increases each time a page is printed The working space 1s divided into three s ots A slot is vertical slice of the page where separate data can be plotted In this particular example the user allocated one big slot to plot magnetic field in two different scales red and blue lines and GPS positions in degrees and decimal minutes The magnetic field is plotted with a fullscale of 50 nT and 500 nT red and blue which allows the operator to see large and small magnetic anomalies The GPS positions are plotted every 2 cm or 29 seconds The second slot is used to plot depth readings in meters The depth axis goes from right to left The third and smallest slot is used to plot the magnetometer signal strength It has a fixed scale and the signal axis goes from left to right The fullscale range 1s chosen based on the acceptable values for signal strength 500 to 2500 Data can be plotted in two different
211. is started by selecting File Play back survey menu as it is shown in the following picture 215 ML HagLog NT wiew Configure Help Start New Survey Ctrl Continue Existing Survey Ctrl C Survey Wizard Import map User flags Play b 4c E UMEN 1 Forth cAllister Survey Sharh logana et Stop Logaghg Entre Tenia Survey etre Exit Program To prepare a survey for playback MagLog reads all collected log files and sorts their records with respect to time This might take a few minutes depending on the amount of data When this is complete the playback control center dialog starts MagLog playback a 15705 1 00 59 preter z mogga TS SPa iak 108100 I I I I I o The following controls are available e Data playback is offered on a line by line basis The top Scrollbar represents an entire line in time When data is not being played the user can drag the scrollbar handle to set a time for the playback starting point The time listed in the upper middle box is the current playback time The user cannot drag the scroll bar handle during data playback he or she must stop the playback process first by pressing the STOP button e Line to play select the line to play Times on the left and right are start and end times of the line e Speed Depending on your computer hardware performance data can be played up to 50 times faster then they were recorded The user can
212. ission available as you set up the survey GPS setup First you should configure your GPS device twill work best if its connected to one of pour seral ports now If this ts the case press Auboset communication parameters and MagLog will scan Your geral ports to find the GPS port and its baud rate It may take a few minutes therefore if pou know for you think you know these GFS Serial port setup Fort CoM Baud Rate 3600 Back Hest gt Cancel The GPS display can be configured with user selectable background colors and annotation fonts Also MagLog has the capability to import ArcInfo shape file maps more on this in the section Preparing a Survey plan file If there is a map available presented in ArcInfo Shape file format it is possible to combine the GPS display with that map The 13 screen below shows a typical view of the MagLog GPS screen and allows the user to set parameters such as e Press here to set annotation font and user supplied map An additional dialog appears which allows user to set all these parameters It is assumed that user map if any is presented in MagLog format already and user can simply import it If the map has not yet been transformed into MagLog format use the next button Map Import This allows the user to select a set of ArcInfo shape files both shp and shx set of files must be available to be converted into MagLog format Duri
213. itter select it in the list and press the Properties button To remove a particular transmitter or all transmitters use Remove or Remove All buttons To disable a transmitter without removing it from the survey uncheck the checkbox located on the left of the transmitter configuration string Selecting the Add or Properties buttons produce the following dialog 145 Transmitter configuration x TCP UDP connections W Enable TCPYUDP transmission Port number 5999 Mode Server TCF chent UDP Serial Output M Enable serial output Fort COM254 Baud Rate 3600 The following controls are available e TCP UDP connections Check this box to enable data transmission using TCP or UDP protocols If this box is not checked all fields related to TCP or UDP below are disabled e Port number TCP or UDP port number Make sure port is available and not used by some other application or another transmitter within MagLog You may need to try different port numbers Your receiver application should use the same port number e Mode The following modes are available l Di 4 e Server Type the IP address in the form or a host name for those connection types TCP Point to Point connection Server mode Only one client at a time is allowed TCP Point to Point connection Client mode You should type the server IP or a symbolic name in the space provided U
214. itude is plotted at position mm and latitude is plotted at position 25 mm If both are plotted at position 0 mm they will overlap and are not readable Type Select the type of the marker you wish to plot or no marker at all Available selections include cross star circle diamond filled or not Size mm This is the marker size in millimeters Value 1 normally looks good on the paper Digits after dot This controls number of decimal places for the value For latitude and longitude select the appropriate number typically about 7 If decimal degrees is selected as the format the 7 would be the number of decimal places in degrees if degrees and minutes is selected then the 7 is the number of decimal places in minutes if degrees minutes and seconds is selected then 7 is the number of decimal places in seconds You probably need to reduce the number of decimal places if you are using seconds Text height mm This is the height of the printed text in millimeters Increase this number if the text is hard to see Text width mm This is width of the printed text in millimeters Increase this number for bigger text Note that text is bounded by a width x height rectangle The font size is adjusted to fit exactly into this rectangle For instance if the height 1s 4 mm and the width is 10 mm the text appears compressed in the horizontal direction and is not readable You may need to adjust the
215. izontal Digits after dot M OF Cancel A slot is a rectangular region where traces corresponding to a sensor or channel will be plotted Slots are common to most MagLog windows and will be used in the majority of your displays A slot can have unlimited traces All traces will inherit the slot properties such as vertical scaling and sizes of the traces You can fill in details of the current slot as follows Slot Name This is the name you wish to give to the slot It will be printed on top of the slot Time Scaling This is the total duration of the slot in seconds If the duration of the slot exceeds the total size of a device internal buffer MagLog will not be able to re draw the complete slot For instance if the slot duration is large say 600 seconds MagLog will display the data normally scrolling down the slot However when the user changes the vertical scale the beginning of the slot may not be plotted with data The maximum slot duration can be calculated as MagLog device buffer length multiplied by actual device sample rate see Setting options in Maglog ini file 85 Data Scaling This is the width of the slot in data units It corresponds to a variation of the data Pen width This how wide in pixels 1 5 pixels the traces should be plotted Higher values will make the graph appear to have a fatter pen Grid Lines This will allow you to put grid lines on your slot They are by default turned off bu
216. k mode e Data cannot be logged 217 e Program does not automatically re interpolate Fish position If the Interpolator was used during the original survey the survey interpolator log file is read in as it was acquired There is a re interpolation feature discussed in the next section e Program does not post warning dialogs or verbal alarms for instance if data limits exceed preset limits However lights on light bar turn into green red or yellow as they would during the normal survey e Duration of the display slot cannot be adjusted 1 e you cannot make the slot length change in time it 1s fixed to what was set during acquisition Use playback speed to change display speed for all displays e Ifthe user prints the analog traces of the data during playback the label will be printed on the right side of the page each 10 reading Printed time labels correspond to the survey time not playback time Presently MagLog does not play back the following types of surveys e Surveys with non serial devices including event marks e Surveys with serial binary devices e Surveys with A D converted devices 19 2 Position Interpolation with Playback and Interpolator Sometimes a survey may be conducted without the use of the Interpolator feature or the wrong parameters 1 e layback may have been used in the Interpolator setup In this case it is possible to recreate the interpolated data file using a unique feature of playback mode Note that
217. ks MagLog uses win95 version of DRV X28 Installation script sets it up for you driver started after you reboot computer during installation Port address and IRQ in this case are set within MagLog Just in case of trouble you may check that registry entry HKEY LOCAL MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Services DRV X28 Parameters MLm exists and is set to the default value Note that event marker won t work 1f parallel port is in bi directional mode It can be changed via BIOS setup program or by means of switches on the ISA parallel port extension card 247 23 Index 8 RMS 39 AADC 47 48 Acoustic Target 170 Adding Flags 121 Alias Device Name 39 amplitude plot 110 ArcInfo 13 14 103 108 Atlas Boundary 109 Auto logging 159 Automatic printer configuration 129 Average window 113 Azimuth angle 181 Cable payout 64 66 calibration 40 163 164 165 166 167 channels 34 35 36 38 39 40 44 45 88 89 163 164 Chart Speed 151 152 Clear GPS track 101 COMM DR V 205 209 comment 122 cycle time 36 DAS1700 45 Data bar 157 Data Display 22 data sampling rate 231 Device Status Bar 157 Differential GPS fix required 42 Digital Display 86 Display Settings 158 distance units 12 113 161 167 Echo Sounder 66 Ellipsoid Parameters 177 EM61 61 62 63 Enable analog channels 35 ethernet 169 183 184 195 200 Event 42 43 68 153 247 feet or meters 53 16
218. l map to create the map file chances are that map positions differ from GPS by few hundreds of meters unless you are operating in the US and map is based on NAD 83 If the concepts DATUM or WGS 84 are unfamiliar to you see your GPS manual or seek assistance from navigation professional This feature is not accurate enough to be used as a navigation aid for boat or vehicle steering Geometrics accepts no liability nor offers any warranty for the misuse of this feature 6 4 Using Atlas Boundary BNA as MagLog Map file The Atlas BNA format is a simple vector format supported by SURFER software MagLog is capable of using this format instead of the internal map format described above To take advantage of this feature follow these steps e Prepare the map with SURFER The map must only include lines Text will not be converted into the BNA format It is possible to convert text into lines by exporting the map from SURFER in the AutoCAD DXF format and then importing it back into SURFER This will convert text into graphical outlines The map must be based on geodetic coordinates latitude and longitude or UTM coordinates based on the datum that the GPS is using e Export the map in BNA format e In MagLog follow the same steps described for importing a User Map above to load this base map Note Ifthe BNA file consists of UTM coordinates the UTM setup parameters in MagLog Interpolator must match the map parameters Howe
219. l ticks in specially equipped land vehicles carts It is available under NT only All these devices require a specialized driver and hardware installation Please see details under Hardware configuration section In the section below we assume that the drivers are properly configured and running 5 19 1 Configuring TTL event Mark device Go to Configure Input devices and select TTL Event Mark from the list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear 68 TTL event mark setup Logical device parameters Alias device name I Reset counter number to starting value Starting count number E Counter increment li Holdoff tine mz 200 Hardware parameters Parallel port LPT IRO Address 0 378 OF Cancel Alias device name User enters device name Reset counter to starting value This is effective when you edit the configuration of an already running device For example if the counter has counted 1 2 50 and at 50 you opened the configuration dialog box and changed the increment to 2 to get numbers 52 54 56 If Reset counter number is checked and Start count number is set to 0 then the result would be 0 2 4 etc If the box is not checked then you would get 52 54 regardless of the Starting counter setting Starting count number nitial counter value integer Counter
220. lar pulses Select the number of required pulse generators between 1 and 5 Note that the counter selection will determine which pins of CTM 10 main I O connector should be wired Period ms Period in milliseconds for generated pulses Duration ms Width of each pulse in milliseconds If the signal is used to trigger the G 822A Super Counter the duration should be 2 ms 1 ms may be too short Real time interval correction CTM 10 card has evidenced a problem with internal interrupts perhaps due to card design This problem appears as false interrupt generation For example if the period is set to 100 ms the expected interrupts times are 100 200 300 1000 ms However in a few cases the card may produce interrupts at 100 200 202 300 1000 Here is 202 is a false interrupt and must be discarded In this case real time interval correction should be used Let us assume that the first pulse arrived at 100 ms and that the period is 100 ms and tolerance is set to 2 ms Then all pulses that appear between 100 and 198 ms will be 71 discarded OF the pulses arriving between 198 and 202 ms only first one is counted If there were no pulses between 198 and 202 ms an artificial pulse at 200 ms is inserted The next period is counted from this artificial pulse if there were no real pulses or from real pulse Thus if a pulse came at 199 ms the next check period would be between 297 and 301 ms Note You should use this feature for prop
221. lays general information like current line number time and date disk and memory free space 157 11 2 The Menus The menus that are available at a given time are dependent upon the active window you have selected This section will describe many of the standard menus always present and some of the device specific menus you will encounter File Menu This menu allows you to start a new survey terminate your existing survey and start or stop logging The options available will depend on the state of the program e g if you don t have any devices configured 1t would not make sense to start logging so that option will be grayed out View This menu allows you to enable or disable the status bar at the bottom of the screen Configure This is used any time you want to configure a device After you have successfully configured your devices it is not necessary to make adjustments in this area Remember that you can reconfigure slot settings by right clicking on the pane and selecting either Display for GPS or SLOT for slot parameters Note Many of the options of this menu can be password protected If you supplied a password on entering the program and later exited you will need to supply a valid password to have access to enter configuration parameters in this menu Display Settings This menu is device dependent A few options are discussed below G 880 Display Settings This menu has many options for changing the scale factor and
222. m artificially creates a pulse at 2000 ms as it would be as if it had arrived The program does this in order to maintain data synchronicity with external pulse per second timing chains used for removal of GPS 70 and operating system latencies If the pulse arrives at say 1500 ms the program disregards it assuming that this is just noise The Log file for this device has a keyword PPS and the program records the arrival time in every string There is no visual display for the PPS GPS device Note After real time interval correction is selected you MUST restart the survey for the option to take effect 5 19 3 Configuring a Trigger device This device requires a CTM 10 or CTM 05 A multifunction card to be installed in the computer Consult the Hardware configuration section and card manual how to install the board The device is available under Windows NT only and the key sys driver must be properly loaded and running If these conditions are met you can go to Configure Input devices and select Trigger from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear Trigger settings Alias Device Mame trig Counter li Pernod ms 100 Duration ms E M Realtime interval corection Tolerance me 2 Cancel Alias Device Name User enters the name of the device Counter CTM 10 card has 5 counters that can be used to generate rectangu
223. maly is required It can be a natural or artificial source just piece of magnetic metal on the ground will suffice The task is to complete two precise survey lines in opposite directions over the source as quickly as possible to minimize diurnal shift offsets 222 Layback latency position errors estimation Positioning error survey surface After the magnetometer positions are calculated in real time or in post processing the two recorded anomaly profiles should match If not as shown above the distance between the anomalies represents a positioning error The following rules apply in understanding and correcting these errors Assuming that there is no notable latency in the GPS and magnetometer channels e If you have to shift anomalies forward along survey line to match them the cable or antenna to sensor distance is actually shorter by half of the distance between anomalies e If you have to shift anomalies backwards along survey line to match them the cable or antenna to sensor distance is really longer by half of the distance between anomalies Assuming the cable length is correct magnetometer and GPS latency issues dominate e Assuming magnetometer has no latency if you have to shift anomalies forward along survey line to match them then the GPS has latency e Assuming GPS has no latency if you have to shift anomalies backward along survey line to match them then the magnetometer has latency For mari
224. me the sensor encountered the anomaly enabling the user to bracket the anomaly for additional survey lines in the area When a MagLog survey is terminated and later restarted it logs data into the existing survey files Therefore it is possible to use the Playback feature which cannot run during normal survey operation to review the data of several lines over an anomaly This allows the operator to evaluate the size and shape of the anomaly by reviewing several different lines over the anomalous area and restructuring the survey plan to acquire additional data over the anomaly area When exiting Playback mode and restarting the survey the new data will be appended to the existing survey data files For surveys where the Interpolator device is enabled the playback mode uses the Interpolator file to display GPS and fish position If the Interpolator device was not working properly no GPS display will be available The program checks the size of the Interpolator log file and reports the following error if it does not exist or has size less then 80 bytes maglog rs Warming INTERPOLATOR file does not exists or too small Please re interpolate positions or remove IN TERPOLATOR GPS will not be displayed without re interpolation Go to Configure Output devices nterpolator In this case the user can re create the Interpolator file in the playback mode see the following section Some operations that cannot be performed in playbac
225. me you will see defined area boundary coordinate list Button Add ArcInfo shape file allows the user to include shape files in the survey plan Both shp and shx file type must be available for the program to import the boundary maps successfully Shape files are available from the ESRI website shown below ESRI requires that you register to download the data We suggest using the demographic Tiger database located at http www esri com data download census2000_tigerline index html Please note that shape files should use the same geodetic datum as GPS you are using for example WGS 84 Contact your GPS manufacturer or us if you are unclear on this point Buttons Remove element and Remove all allows you to remove a selected element or all elements from the table Survey map elements Button Edit element modifies parameters of a mark or individual line It does not allow you to change parameters in the shape file Save table and Load table buttons allow you to save or modify the Survey map elements table for future reference Note that it is a simple ASCII file which cannot be used as MagLog map Clip Area All survey plan information can be clipped into a rectangular region if needed To clip uncheck Don t clip box and specify West and East and North and South limits Note that GPS flags can be used to enter limits of the clipping area using North East flags and South West
226. meters behind the boat See below for further discussion of what happens with this value if you specify a tow point position Use Position of Tow Point Instead of GPS Offset This enables position 1b as described earlier To do this you need to input two offsets from the GPS a X offset Distance from the GPS in a direction parallel to a line going across the boat from port to starboard Starboard 1s considered to be positive More discussion is given later in this chapter if needed b Y offset Distance from the GPS in a direction parallel to a line going from the back of the boat to the front of the boat The front of the boat is considered the positive direction In order for this position to be calculated you need to have a GYRO available Note If this is checked the tow point will be used in place of the GPS in all further calculations The results stated above will change when the Use Tow Point box is checked All distances and points are calculated from the Tow Point ORE GYRO Cable Length It is recommended to put 0 for this value Otherwise it will calculate a shifted point equal to the length of the cable measured 100 meters behind the boat with respect to the tow point ORE is ignored meters behind the boat Otherwise it will calculate a shifted point 173 with respect to the tow winch meters behind the boat Cable Length no GYRO NO CALCULATION POSSIBLE NONE no GYRO NO CALCULATION
227. mplete description of all controls in this dialog box follows Stop print time and date This is time of the bottom of the page and may be listed as End Page Time in your dialog box Because some print layouts will have stored an earlier time or day in their setup the program will attempt to synchronize the current time with your print layout when you call File Windows print in MagLog menu Layout name Optional string with layout name This name is used when layout file 1s installed as one of the default Wizard layouts Total page duration Page duration in minutes Time grid interval Time grid interval in seconds Lines At the start At the end controls These controls are used mostly in playback mode when user wants to position page at the beginning or at the end of the line 128 Select appropriate line and then press At the start or At the end buttons to move to the beginning or end of the page to the selected line Do this and watch how Start print time changes Color and styles This group of controls allows changing page frame line colors and styles It also disables or enables drawing of Geometrics logo at the center of the page Margins Sets page margins in centimeters After dialog is closed with Ok button program adjusts page look on the screen Min slot width cm Controls minimum portion on the page which can be used as a slot to draw the data Minimum
228. must precede devices Device alias is the device alias assigned during creation of that device and displayed on the light bar Device channel is the number of the channel to be used Signs or are mandatory No spaces are allowed inside You can mix different devices in one formula Bias is a constant to be added to the final formula e Use the lower area of the dialog box to create a new term for the formula For example to plot magnetic field select mag in the Device field 1 Channel field and then click Add new term This Formula becomes mag 1 Add new term can be used as many times as needed For example to display total water depth assuming that there is a depth sensor as magnetometer channel 3 and an altimeter as magnetometer channel 4 assemble the following formula mag 3 mag 4 If you need to scale the data channel enter scale before pressing add new term If there is any bias to be used in the final formula append it Real time plots can be tied to the GPS position or the Fish position the latter 1s only possible if the INTERPOLATOR device is used After enabling all the desired information the GPS on track plots dialog may look like GPS on track plots E4 Flot types M Stack plot Imag Modia M Load mao O Modia I Amplitude mag t hip M vawe magi i Flot parameters Average window m 100 stack scale meters unit li Stack gravity azimuth fao L Gradie
229. n Default baud rate for the CM 201 counter in G 880 88 1 823 is 9600 Port refers to the computer serial port to which you have connected the device You should then see a series of numbers magnetometer data strings scrolling up on the large empty box This confirms that the communications port is receiving data MagLog can also use a TCP IP connection to talk to the magnetometer for example the magnetometer can be connected to serial to TCP IP converter and the converter connected to the network To use TCP IP select TCP IP from Port list the last selection in the list Then enter a Host name or IP address and a Port number and press the Connect button to initiate the connection Enable analog channels This is accomplished by making entries in the section labeled Analog Channels On Counter refers to the CM 201 counter board that is installed in each magnetometer so we are effectively setting up the analog output 35 channels in each magnetometer sensor electronics assembly To enable a channel from a counter enter a channel number as shown above Multiple channels should be separated by a space For instance if you have two magnetometers one with field signal depth and altimeter and the second with field and signal you will enter the following Counter 1 1 23 Note Channel default is Signal Strength Counter 2 1 Channel 2 default is Depth Transducer Channel 3 default is Echo Sou
230. n It is updated at the selected time interval Digits are resized when the window is resized in much the same way as the digital slots are resized 8 Using Flags There is a common need to identify an anomaly on the chart plot with a position MagLog solves this problem by means of User Flags Each flag is simply an identifier with its Flag type and associated Latitude and Longitude Flags are saved in an ASCII file and can be edited with any ASCII editor or directly accessed via MagLog Fi e menu under User Flags If you call this item the following window appears User Flags Longitude G_mag 122242 7 4653 37 91 34 6756 F_magt2 FISH 1222427 5499 oF 91 33 2455 anchor MAP os aa ee 9207 37 91 36 41 21 MAP_H4 MAP 122 24 30 5991 37 91 40 7493 MAF_H5 1222433 9651 37 91 45 1522 Load Remove Remove al Edit Color EEJ Format Aaeeea EEE E E E i Plot flag ID File name F data SanFBaysraw 417_ 08 OO test Survey FLAGS PE V Append to the list on load or to the filefon sawe D Auto save on new map field flag Ok Cancel Flag names created by MagLog are abbreviated in the following manner Depending on type of position requested by the user when he or she created this flag the first letter would be G for GPS position or F for the Fish position If the flag was created on the GPS display at the mouse location the first three letters will be MAP If flag was
231. n and the scale factor that you choose will be roughly equal to the size of the area you would like to look After making any adjustments to the GPS map parameters you can enable the GPS display by pressing OK You should then see a GPS window appear in your MagLog program After the GPS display is established the first time you can right click on it to call a contextual menu Option Display calls a dialog box to re configure display the same as above You also can read the Latitude and Longitude of the mouse position on the program status bar The format can be set as decimal degrees degrees and minutes or degrees minutes and seconds 100 6 2 1 GPS display context menu and mouse functions Using a right mouse click on the GPS Track Plot window will bring the following menu Set MAP Flag List Flags Display Clear GPS track Hide old GFS track Sr all GPS track 4dd plan elements w Auto Scroll Zoom Inf Zoom Cut 3 mp Pan East i gt ePan West lt 3 4 Pan Morth Pan South e Set MAP flag Sets a flag in the current mouse position Flags set with this function have names such as MAP where is the flag number These flags are useful because they mark positions that can be converted into survey plan elements see below e List Flags Brings a dialog box with a list of all flags set so far It provides for saving or loading flags from the file editing flag s
232. n 1s set to 10 minutes a new page is printed every 10 minutes Your computer system should be powerful enough to handle data acquisition and printing tasks at the same time Most modern PCs can do this with ease However if an older PC and or operating system are used less than 400MHz older than Win98 this feature may fail In this case the user can print survey pages in playback mode to avoid overhead during the critical survey time e If the user wants to re configure the printer page layout continuous printing will be interrupted 123 e Print layout consists of a page model page size areas to print data to print how to print etc and printer settings printer name properties etc Printer layouts are kept in separate files and not in the general survey file This makes it easy to have multiple layouts for one survey and exchange layouts between different surveys Layouts are interchangeable between the surveys only if the same device alias names are used in all surveys for example if customer has a 880 magnetometer and it has the alias name 880 in all his or her surveys and not 880 in one survey and mag in another survey Below is a description of the printer page and an example how a printer layout can be configured Note that MagLog has a set of pre defined layouts that can be employed when the survey is configured using the MagLog setup Wizard 9 2 MagLog page example Below is typical MagLog printout Th
233. n font OF Cancel The following options are available 6 1 1 Orientation Set Portrait for vertical slots or Landscape for horizontal Note in general we find horizontal plotting easier to understand as a vertical slice down through the data plots allows one to see all data at the same time Background color set background for slot Slot border color Set border color for the slot Auto center time minutes Set this time to auto center wrapped slots after certain time Use 0 to disable this feature Annotation font Set annotation font for the slot header Use the same time scale for all slots If this box 1s checked then a change in the time scale for one slot will cause an automatic change in the time scale for all slots in the window This makes it easy to keep all data slots synchronized Configuring a Slot 84 This dialog box appears when you have selected Add Trace or Properties from the previous dialog box It allows you to edit add and remove traces as well as customize individual features of the selected slot Slot Configuration Slot Properties Defined Traces For Current Slot Channel 1 Wrz Ratio 1 000 slot Name Channel 5 Hrz Fatio 1 000 Mags Time Scaling 2 50 Data Scaling 51 Pen width m AUTO ADD TRACE ADD TRACE REMOVE TRACE PROPERTIES Fined scale Digital diplay setup Grid lines Use digital display only F Wertical Hor
234. n this value may be increased WCSCOutBufLen This is the size of the output serial communication buffer that will be used for each opened port This value may be increased to enhance transmission speeds WCSCInBufHigh This is the character count at which the kernel driver will either lower the RTS line or lower the DTR line or send an XOFF to indicate that the remote should stop sending data This value only has meaning if flow control is desired 208 WCSCInBufLow This is the character count at which the kernel driver will either raise the RTS line or raise the DTR line or send an XON to indicate that the remote should start sending data again This value only has meaning if flow control is desired 18 2 3 Using COMM DRV within MagLog software The standard serial port used by MagLog has only two parameters port number and baud rate The serial port controlled by COMM DRV requires many more which can be hardware specific for instance PCI and ISA ports have different parameter set In fact COMM DRYV does not use a parameter for port number To avoid providing a full set of parameters for each device MagLog maps COMM DRV to the logical serial ports prior to the survey This keeps all COMM DRYV related information in one place and provides the usual port setup during the survey To distinguish between standard and real time ports the latter are marked with a star For instance 1f COM is showed as COM 1 during the survey
235. n to work Verify the source using HyperTerminal on a standard serial port or another computer Connect the source to the first port you are going to map e Start MagLog and go to Configure Map COMM DRYV ports menu and press Add button Enter port parameters Verify port by testing it If the port is not working revise port parameters for possible errors e If port is working proceed to the next port Reconnect your serial source and repeat the procedure until all ports are known to work e Save the resulting table in the separate file for future reference Note The CM201CFG configuration program does not work with COMM DRV ports Please configure the magnetometer and store its configuration prior to the survey then disable CM201CFG launch by setting DO NOT CONFIGURE 880 0 in maglog ini file see section Setting options through Maglog ini In this mode user is responsible for assigning correct number of analog channels per magnetometer After the port mapping is completed MagLog is ready for the survey During the survey configure devices as usual The only visible difference will be an asterisk after the COM number which indicates it is a COMM DRYV port 18 2 4 Using GPSPCI card to synchronize MagLog time with UTC COMM DRYV real time serial driver can reduce serial port timing inaccuracy to 1 millisecond or less However it cannot address problem with GPS latency because this 1s due to the GPS not to the PC or
236. naes 68 5492 sConjourine PPS GES dEV Egusi s S S NS 70 SAISI Cnu a TCO deV Oranen e T Fd 5 19 4 Configuring Speedometer device wheel tick ccccccccccccccccccccseeeeeee ee teeees 72 5 20 GENERIC SERIAL TRIGGERED DEVICES csesssssecccceeeeesesssssesecceeesesesssseaaeceeees 73 5 20 1 ASCII trigger ASCII output DGH1 141 o ccccccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 73 5 20 2 Binary hexadecimal trigger string binary fixed length data 3DM GX1 75 5 20 3 Honeywell PPT Precision Pressure Transducer device 00000000000000 80 6 CONFIGURING INPUT DEVICES FOR DISPLAY ccccccssssssssssssssssssssees 81 O SUT US PAY porcos ar erence lace eas paca ataatunat sss aoe Sas alasta eas cae usenet uses 82 Ope HC ON Ol ee a E AET EE E N 84 OL CO OUNO CTV ACC a a aa tea ones saseaeetdaaateameas aeehs 87 O gt FUE NED P een a A 91 O24 Horizontal Slots and Slot LCOCHG sseccios snbracnd Aceea nae taciaeeiae sanbeaead T 95 OL DOCO INCI isaac E tect ale aera E eels aeeeeei once 95 O40 DOSE AQ USNM aia a R E E T E E E E 96 6 2 CONFIGURING THE GPS DISPLAY sssssssssseeseessssssssereesssssessrereeesssssserreesessssessrreee 96 6 2 1 GPS display context menu ANd MOUSE FUNCTIONS o oo 101 6 PREPARING ASURVEY PLAN PILE preirinta E A E O E a TATR 102 6 4 USING ATLAS BOUNDARY BNA As MAGLOG MAP FILE ccccccceessseeeeeeeeees 109 Ox WSINGON TRACK PLO Siesia ene ion siacacesteet ialotclassowseutns eon sacece
237. nder Altimeter In this case 0 always refers to the digital magnetic field value that is always on and 1 2 and 3 refer to the auxiliary analog channels that the program will enable It is not necessary to enter 0 in the dialog box because the magnetic field is always enabled If the analog channel is not valid you will probably get some nonsensical dummy strings 1 e the counter will try to output a number even if there is no reading If you accidentally enable a channel that is not valid you can correct the setup and then re send it to the CM 201 counter in the magnetometer using the Send Configuration button 3 Check for correct data After entering all channel information you can check to see if you are getting correct data by counting the number of transmitted data fields separated by commas For instance in the above example one would expect to see strings such as 40001 24 0243 2001 1209 40291 35 0543 From this you could easily tell if there was a missing a channel by counting the fields In this case you specified six channels and received six strings the correct result To examine the data you can check Stop window update check box This stops updating the screen scrolling which enables one to examine the data Field Estimated data rate Hz shows approximate sample rate as the CM201CFG program estimates it This is approximate value in Hz for the QC purposes 4 Specify Cycle Time Y
238. ne surveys the maximum allowable mismatch between anomalies is about 1 meter depending on GPS accuracy 223 Note This discussion does not cover possible internal GPS errors due to loss of satellites or differential signal 20 2 Conducting Laboratory Latency Tests for Magnetometer Data Acquisition Systems This document describes how to test the overall latency of the logging computer and software when engaged in recording and storing magnetometer data Latency in this case is defined as the time difference between when the actual reading is taken and when it is time tagged and written to disk There 1s concern about excessive latency because it translates into position errors visible during data processing herringbone or scalloped anomaly structure There is virtually no latency delay between time the magnetometer takes a reading and the time it outputs the reading to its serial port However on the data acquisition side of the system computers and their serial connections are handled by MS Windows operating systems win9x NT 2000 XP etc and thus data is not immediately available to the logging software because the data transfer is delayed by Windows serial drivers This delay can lead to position errors because computer generated time stamps are used to interpolate the locations of the magnetometer Here is a simple method to estimate system latency 20 2 1 Hardware you will need e 88X 880 88 1 882 magnetometer cable et
239. nfigure GPS Display you will see the dialog box 97 GPS PLOT CONFIGURATION x Resolution Horizontal Scale Factor n miles 0 55531 7722115677 Vertical Scale Factor n miles 0 390625 Settings M Keep aspect ratio I Plot coordinate grid Plot realltime fish position Plot gradient Gradient plot scale ms ntemk 10 Appearance GFS mark Defaut gt Mark color Positions Logged posz pc Background Border User map Hi Gradient Survey area Annotation font User map if Load user map from file Browse LM agLogD atagps map Cancel This dialog box allows you to specify horizontal and vertical scale factors for the portion of the GPS graph you will be observing Because of the projection distortion and aspect ratio of the window the input values are used by MagLog as a recommendation only The actual spatial extents are plotted in the window Plot real time Fish position This option is only available if the MagLog Interpolator is running see below MagLog will show the position of the vessel GPS and the calculated position of the magnetometer Fish using an internal dragging algorithm However if the screen distance between the boat and Fish 1s less than the size of the GPS mark the Fish position 1s not plotted Keep aspect ratio To have uniform scaling along both axes check this box This may misrepresent the trackplot x and y distan
240. ng conversion geometry information can be clipped into a rectangular region and user marks and user lines can be added to the view This is a separate feature from that portion of the program under File that provides Create Survey Plan ability to create survey lines in the GPS map area Note that ArcInfo shape files are available for most regions of the world on several Internet sights at no charge Only linear features such as coastlines roads etc are taken from shape files Point features as well as names in any associated dbf file are ignored The user should take care in employing this MagLog feature as large numbers of shape file elements can slow down the program performance GPS display properties 122 62315227 38 0276948 Here you can set GPS display parameters such as colors annotation font ard User supplied map For default just press next To set parameters press button NOTE user uppled map is an ASCII file with Lat Lon pairs in each string Blank string denotes end of the line Coordinates in this file must be related to the same datum as your GPS Map import Back Nest gt Cancel San Francisco Bay Arcinfo Shape file map 14 4 3 Configuring magnetometer or EM pulse 12 hardware The Wizard next takes us to the magnetometer configuration section It is recommended that the magnetometer be connected to one of the computer serial ports and sending data during this p
241. ng will be plotted The second allows combining different channels into one value A typical example is plotting total water depth for magnetometer equipped with altimeter and depth sensor In this case it 1s desirable to plot sum of these two values to track sea floor topography The Composite formula can be used to linearly combine data from any devices regardless their sample rate If devices are sampling at different rates data is interpolated to the same time interval before plotting values Device Alias Lists all alias devices available in the program plus special devices INT for MagLog Interpolator if used and Flags for user s flags Select the appropriate device for data plot In the case of a GPS it would be GPS Device channel Select device channel to plot Popular devices like magnetometers or GPS report their channel by names some of the devices report them by number Select Lon for longitude 137 Formula Add Interpolate formula to step Use auto step See discussion about adding magnetic field plot The meaning of these controls is the same as for trace plot Marker color Select marker color Marker is plotted to the left of the numerical value text The center of the marker corresponds to the time of the reading Horizontal position mm This is the distance from the left border of the slot to the marker You may need to adjust it to avoid overlap with other markers as an example long
242. nly 9 Using Windows printers and print drivers 9 1 General considerations Starting with version 2 8 MagLog software has a new feature that prints graphical plots of data using standard Windows system printer s including network printers PDF converters and other types of printer like devices in real time or during post processing 122 Windows printers include lasers ink jets and Epson style dot matrix or Printrex thermal printers that have Windows drivers Windows printing is available under the File Windows print menu in either survey or playback mode If this menu item is grayed out it means that the printing library DevPrint DLL 1s not in the same folder as the maglog exe file Default location for DevPrint DLL file is in C Program Files Geometrics Note Windows printing option is completely independent from the earlier developed continuous Printrex Epson dot matrix print feature usually accessed through Configure Output Devices Printer The Windows system print feature prints discrete pages not continuous printing as offered under MagLog direct printing feature to continuous printers such as Printrex and dot matrix devices Also note that when the survey is running there are two Start Printing buttons listed under File dialog box Start Direct Printing Printrex Dot Matrix and Windows Print Windows system printers Make sure you select the proper start button The user should be aware of certain requir
243. none Values for calibration Cone value 1074 00 Curent average 1070 00 Acceptable range Use as depth for TrackPoint II List of calibration points Reading Value Predicted Cancel discard results Note At this time depth data is coming from the Fish that is being analyzed by the program to compute the bias and scale factor You must place the Fish on at least two depths to get an accurate calculation During Altimeter Calibration discussed later you must be over a hard bottom and the Fish must be held horizontally level You can add measured points to this menu and have it automatically calculate your scale factor and bias The depth sensor needs to be in the water for at least 15 minutes before you take your first measurement This allows the temperature of the electronics to stabilize To add a new point place Fish at known depth Press Reset Average to discard current average and wait for a few minutes to acquire a new one Number after text Current average should stabilize Then enter the depth that the device is at under Value and press Add to the list This will take the average measurement MagLog currently sees for the depth and it will add it to a list of calibration points It is important to remember to reset the average if you move the sensor You can do this by pressing Reset Av You can also specify an acceptable range of points to be used by pressing Acceptable Range
244. nt limit 2 Max Amlitude fio Data step to plot value Distance to plot value 200 Value digits after dot jo Mise range for amplitude plot Min lo Mir fo Positive color Negative color Font OF Cancel 112 There are important parameters to be used for on track plots They are listed in the bottom part of the dialog box Typically each type of plot needs its parameters to be entered Below is the list of plot types with their corresponding parameters 1 Stack plot The following values affect the Stack Plot o Average window in meters To find the middle line for a Stack Plot the O program uses a low pass Bartlett filter You must enter the length of the filter The typically filter should be longer than expected anomalies but not too much longer For example for marine UXO survey at 40 feet total water depth a value 100 meters for the filter would be logical Stack scale meters per unit This is the scale to convert field units nT into distance units meters to be plotted on the map Stack gravity azimuth This is the direction where positive anomalies would gravitate For example if the survey consists of lines going South North and this value is 90 degrees then positive anomalies would be plotted to the East regardless of the direction of the survey line Positive and negative colors Positive areas of the Stack Plot are plotted with the positive color neg
245. ode the program uses its own format codes which are D for double precision 8 bytes F for float 4 bytes I for int 4 bytes S for short 2 bytes and C for char 1 bytes All formats are PC native formats For example GPS channel list 1 2 4 can be used with binary format string DDC which will output Lat Lon as 8 byte floating point and the number of satellites as a character it is unlikely that number of satellites exceeds 128 In this case total length for GPS data is 8 8 1 17 bytes In addition to the channels specified by the user the following information will be appended to the end of the string 233 number of error messages during status interval number of samples during status interval These values are sent as integers in ASCII mode and as short values 2 bytes in binary mode For the GPS device in addition to above 2 values 5 values are appended number of messages with GPS QC 0 1 2 3 4 The entire data parcel in binary mode has the following structure 1 Header 4 bytes 2 Data parcel length including header 2 bytes 3 Data for devices in the same order as they are set in the configuration dialog 21 4 Setting options through Maglog ini Some of the options specified in the file Maglog ini are very useful You can edit this file by navigating to your Windows directory and selecting the file maglog ini The options you might find useful are 1 Font This desc
246. of target s position to find direction If equal 180 dragging approach is used to find position Note Always use 180 degrees azimuth if magnetometer 1s connected to the acoustic target with cable 17 2 6 Net Dialog This dialog box allows you to configure parameters for data output via a TCP IP network or serial connection Your specific output format should be configured using the Output Devices Interpolator output dialog box see Interpolator Output prior to enabling output transmission Interpolator params x Mags TRK UTM GRAD Positions Net TCP UDP connections W Enable TCP UDP transmission Port number 44965 Mode UDP Server TCF chent UDF Jiocalhost Status Disconnected Serial Output Fort COME Baud Aate 38400 Cancel 183 Enable TCP UPD transmission This enables output via a TCP IP network connection You will need to have a TCP IP network installed for this to work properly Mode MagLog can work as a TCP IP server or client for Interpolator data transmission as well as send or broadcast in UDP mode depending on the Mode selected Available modes are e TCP Point to Point connection Server mode Only one client at a time is allowed There is no need to specify host name or IP in this case e TCP Point to Point connection Client mode You should type the server IP or symbolic name in the space provided e UDP connection to the
247. ogiost ions 110 r WEENIE W ENDOW SS vosccccsecsepisosccteietescvecreasestibecceudetiesebeaudescyerteasestibessendaliesetiertencver tient 114 7 DIGITAL DISPLAY MINI WINDOW jaxicciitesieccauessdeivighttdannoidactttandy ATE 115 S USINGEFELAGS cero eaaa sauten eet duavhades ce aa aE EaR aa 115 8 1 ADDING FLAGS FROM DISPLAY SLOTS sssssssseseseeessssssssssssssererrrreeeessssessssssesertteeee 120 52 ADDPINGELAGS PROM GPS DISSA Y encanuneni e a 120 5 3 ADDING FLAGS USING HOT KEYS suctsteineaceeduinletenteee tia A 121 8 4 USING COMMENTS TO FLAG POSITIONS scccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 9 USING WINDOWS PRINTERS AND PRINT DRIVERS cccccsccceees 122 Out GENERAN CONSIDERATIONS nuin pene euacess 122 9 2 MAGLOG PAGE EXAMPLE inris aioe anaa de tutah lacsauiets duruleta E 124 9 3 CONFIGURING MAGLOG PAGE LAYOUT ccc csccssccccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeessssecaaaaneceeeeeeeeeees 127 93 Delne up PINE ONO PITE eei a E O eos eieadet br 9 3 2 Setting up slots to draw the data automatically cccccccceeee ecient 129 9 3 3 Setting up slots to draw the data manually ccccccceccceeceee eesti eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 93d Fopululihe SOSW AlI a EAE N veto eda a 131 Vil 9 4 PRINTING MAGLOG PAGES IN REAL TIME SURVEY c scscscececcceccccccceccceececececececs 14 9 5 PRINTING MAGLOG PAGES IN PLAYBACK MODE c ccscescescescescescescescescescescesces 142 10 CONFIGURING OTHER DEVICES 0 0
248. oils use this selection Connect coils to slots 1 and 2 10 Pulse 12 3 coil system For pulse 12 EM device with three coils Note that even if there is only one coil available but is connected to slot 3 you should select system as 3 coils after wizard finishes remove slots for coils 1 and 2 If your hardware configuration does not match exactly one of these 7 pre defined sets adjustments are easy to make For example if you have 2 each G 880 magnetometers with 16 depth sensor and altimeter on one of them then you can use configuration 6 In this case the depth transducer and altimeter for the second magnetic sensor will output zero values and that is ok for most data processing programs However if your hardware consists of 3 magnetic sensors in a gradiometer array you will not be able to use the Wizard to set up the multi sensor array and will have to configure the logging and display manually see sections Configuring the G 880 magnetometer and Configuring Input Devices for Display On the Wizard screen you should now set the desired cycle rate for magnetometer Typical values for the 880 family would be 0 1 seconds 10 HZ and typical value for the marine proton magnetometer is 1 0 seconds 1 0 Hz or 2 0 seconds 0 5 Hz After all parameters are set and the auto detection sequence has been completed press the Next button Before going to the next Wizard screen the program will attempt to communicate
249. on ite file The column headers are added into the file as well which allows many programs to recognize the variables ou may save this Information into the file for future reference lt Back Cancel 4 6 Data Display configuration MagLog has several different options for displaying incoming data Primarily the data is presented in the form of analog strip chart traces or profiles There can be multiple analog charts on the screen slots with multiple pens profiles per slot and they can be oriented in either horizontal or vertical mode Also each chart slot can be set with individual rates of speed and full scale values The Wizard covers only a subset of the possible display configurations The user can choose from the following display configurations Horizontal landscape or vertical portrait graph orientation Trace color Coordinate grid color Annotation text font and color Window background color We recommend the horizontal graph orientation for better overall presentation Depending on the configuration MagLog will display one or more traces in each display slot For example 1f there is only one magnetic sensor its field is displayed with color 1 22 If there are two magnetometers then color 1 used for first sensor and color 2 used for the second sensor and both fields are displayed in the same slot All these parameters can be changed later manually after the survey is configured Here is a typi
250. osition of tow point can be calculated ONLY if gyro compass is available s offset m posite to starboard 2 10 Y offset m positive to bow OK Cancel It is beneficial to specify the magnetometer offset and the tow point as a backup calculation If the ORE were to malfunction there would still be a valid calculation of the magnetometer positions using the tow point and dragging algorithm The magnetometer offset 1s specified to be 50 m or if there was a cable length measuring device this would be specified as 0 The X and Y offsets are measured from the GPS to the tow point as seen in example A 197 2 Fill out TRK Screen Interpolator params E4 Mags THF UTM Positions Net M Use ORE Trackpoint II Number of acoustic targets List ORE target numbers i amp offset for hydrophone m 1 Y offset for hydrophone m 3 M Enable median filtering Filter size ic M Use serial Gyro to calculate position The Use ORE Trackpoint IT option must be enabled in order for any ORE calculations to take place There is only one acoustic target The X and Y offsets are specified with regard to the tow point In this case we are using a serial GYRO the GYRO 1s not connected to the ORE so we need to check the Enable Serial Gyro to calculate position option box The offsets cannot be entered until this is checked We also specified a tow point under MAG tab
251. ot use pulse devices with Geometrics parallel port driver However it is still possible to work with the DRV X28 driver which however gives less accuracy e wdj0 sys Analog wdj sys but to handle LPT2 Also can be used to log trigger pulses if internal CTM 10 interrupt is disabled additional wiring between CTM 10 and LPT2 required e kei sys Driver to control CTM 10 card if any If this driver not started on improper configured you get next message when trying to start trigger device maglog Can not open Keithley CM 10 device Please check kesye driver started All driver files located under C WINNT SYSTEM32 DRIVERS and have their parameters in the Windows Registry To check if drivers are started you can use Devices applet from Windows Control Panel Device Status Startup Wee TAM Disabled Vigab ave Started System VigaStart System Sart wWwdadc a Disabled wd30c24a Disabled top Automatic widji Manual __Statup nee Maa Hw Profiles weitekp3 Disabled __ WinDriver Started Automatic Help Here we can see that wdj driver started and wdj0 not By means of this applet you can start and stop drivers Typically after you change driver s parameters in the Registry you have to restart it or by rebooting PC or by stopping and starting driver by means of Devices applet You also can check if DRV X28 started 244 Note Be careful stopping and starting drivers while system i
252. ote that Central meridian field will be filled in automatically if you auto detected the GPS Other values have to be physically measured on the vessel and entered The final Interpolator Configuration screen presents the layout of the Interpolator log file This file consists of many columns and includes magnetic field signal depth and altimeter readings as well as the GPS antenna and magnetometer Fish positions The file can be loaded directly into popular programs like Golden Software s SURFER or Geometrics MagMap2000 It is recommended that you note which data are in which columns for future reference during the analysis and interpretation phase of the data reduction and map making You can save the information by clicking on the Save this information into file box 21 Interpolator file description 7 Surfer maglite Survey INTE HE File Edit Format Data wind interpolator file columns Mag reading O a a d2 o Meot sona S 4 Date 4 Time 1 Magi_reading Magi _sig z Longitude GPS position interpola 2 59647772 55 B Latitude GFS position interpolate 56 f Longitude layback point mterpo Ca 459602 106 ER sar layback point interpola skip ey 59646 91 562 J 5 e obd odi al 11 Longitude 1 st mag interpolated This screen shows interpolator file layout le Latitude 1 st mag interpolated Longitude 2 nd mag interpolated Latitude 2 nd mag interpolated Save this informati
253. ou may also specify the cycle time the time between sequential magnetometer readings Cycle time is specified in units of 0 01 seconds total time between readings cycle time times 01 seconds so if you want ten magnetometer readings per second you will specify 10 or 1f you wanted five magnetometer readings per second you will specify 20 Note that for the CM 201 the practical limit on cycle time is approximately 20Hz The system can be run at 40Hz or higher but there will be significant degradation of the signal quality Remember that you have to press Send Configuration to make any changes to the above configuration If you want to reset the magnetometer to its original powered on state press Reset Configuration Note After you have specified these settings once setup will default to these same settings until you change them 36 In 2002 Geometrics began shipping G 881 and G 882 marine magnetometers with the CM 221 counter hardware This counter allows storage of default startup parameters in the processor memory A button labeled Store configuration is available for those sytems employing the CM 221 counter hardware check your firmware version to see if your magnetometer has this feature After powering down the magnetometer and powering it back up again the magnetometer starts up with the same settings number of analog channels baud rate sample rate etc as it had when the configuration was stored Solu
254. oup you need to have the magnetometer running Complete the magnetometer setup and then return to its properties box using Configure Input devices dialog You will have the ability to set quality control values for your analog channels e g depth and altimeter by selecting the sensor number channel number and pressing QC Range This will bring up a dialog box that you can fill out to set quality control values A sample is shown below QC range for sensor 1 channel Dep th x Mire fio Max 100 Do not apply OC range for this channel Cancel Here we have selected Sensor 1 and selected the analog channel depth The option labeled Do not apply QC range for this channel is usually checked which would result in no quality control factors being used for this channel However we have unchecked it and set a minimum value of 10 and a maximum of 1000 Ifa depth value is not within the range we have specified we will get a warning message Note The signal quality control should only be enabled from the main screen If you enable quality control through the button OC Range but do not specify any values under QC on the main screen the program will not generate any warning messages You also have the option of setting quality control values for the three unnamed analog channels 4 5 and 6 Channels to 3 are for signal depth and altimeter Additional analog channels are available in t
255. our depth sensor you should see immediate changes in your data The graphs and displays will use the new calibrated values However the device file will have the uncalibrated values logged in it G 880 If you need to store calibrated values you should use the Interpolator device that will write calculated depths and altitudes based on the entered or calculated scale and bias values into the Interpolator file 16 5 Why should we calibrate This is a brief discussion on how MagLog calculates scale and bias values and why this is needed The depth sensor is a pressure transducer This means that for a given pressure it will output a number proportional to the pressure measured However the number is meaningless until we solve for a few factors Assume that the depth reading 1s related to the pressure reading by the following 167 Depth AxPressure b In this case the two parameters A and b are the scale and bias values that we need to find We can solve for these two values if we have at least two sets of measurements If we measure the following Depth MagLog Reading pressure Y1 XI X2 X2 I can then get two independent equations Yl AxX1 b Y2 AxX2 b Solving for A and b I get A Y1 Y2 X1 X2 b Y2xX1 Y1xX2 X1 X2 From here we can now use these new values to calculate the correct depth given only the pressure MagLog can then use these equations to automatically adjust all pressure readin
256. ows associated with your magnetometer you can type a name under Alias Device Name Here we have selected G 880 The sensor setup is also very important Typically the number of magnetometer sensors and channels is set automatically However in certain cases when the magnetometer cannot be interrogated or configured due to downlink communication difficulties you may need to carefully count how many strings are coming in your communications port Above a sample string for two magnetometers was given as 40001 24 0243 2001 1209 40291 35 0543 The incoming string 1s shown above The MagLog program needs to know 1 The number of concatenated magnetometers you have coming into a single serial port you can select up to eight by checking the sensor boxes as shown note that cable length and bandwidth considerations may limit the number of concatenated magnetometers one can employ 2 The number of additional analog channels for each magnetometer The magnetic field value is not assumed to be a channel If we apply these two rules to the string above we notice that we have two magnetometers one with three analog channels and the second with one analog channel Enabling the proper number of channels and sensors is very important 9 You will have another opportunity to change port settings by selecting the Port Settings button and entering information into the following dialog box If the G amp 8 amp 0 Confi
257. page Moves center of the page to the mouse location adjusting page time interval accordingly This function is useful to center an anomaly of interest on the page Move the mouse cursor to the anomaly right click and select Center page Anomaly is moved to the center 140 e Redraw Redraws the page using the latest available data e Zoom This item has a submenu Zoom twice and Reset zoom Zoom twice increases page resolution by factor of 2 for easy detail recognition Scroll bars appear to let user scroll zoomed page The maximum zoom factor is 8 Reset zoom returns the page to its normal size e Next page gt gt and lt lt Previous Page Moves the page in time by page duration interval the same as gt gt and lt lt buttons 9 4 Printing MagLog pages in real time survey After the print page layout is configured you can save it as a template in a file Pressing the Ok button in the page preview dialog saves the layout immediately if the file name was previously assigned To start actual printing call the preview dialog and press the Start printing button this button is disabled 1f printer was not configured if this is the case press Print setup to configure the printer The following choice dialog appears What to print Curent page only All available pages Last pages C Continious printout Print on flag Cancel Print choices Th
258. ple 2000 GPSMaxSample 7200 GR8 amp 00MaxSample 2000 GR8 amp 20MaxSample 2000 PPSMaxSample 2000 858MaxSample 2000 880MaxSample 2000 822 AMaxSample 2000 DO NOT CONFIGURE 880 0 This prevents CM201CFG program from starting when survey with 880 magnetometer started 21 5 MagLog printer layout files The MagLog printer layout is stored in a separate binary file not in the survey file However the survey file has a link to its printer layout file Typically the layout file has the same root name as a survey file with the extension page Note that it is possible to have multiple layouts for the same survey and even switch them on the fly while the survey is running Layout files are interchangeable between surveys as long as survey has the same device names also called aliases For instance if a layout was created for survey 1 with magnetometer name MAG and GPS name GPS it is valid for all surveys where magnetometer and GPS have these names It is not valid for survey 2 where magnetometer is named 880 and GPS Trimble If one would try to use this layout for survey 2 no magnetometer and GPS information would appear on paper In this case the user should re configure the layout to use it with survey 2 The latter is much easier than creating a new layout from scratch because only the device name information has to be corrected layout retains information about slots traces scales etc When a survey is creat
259. position and associated text e Display Bring the GPS display configuration dialog box see Configuring the GPS Display e Clear GPS track In certain cases you may want to hide a previous GPS track The typical example is when a boat cruised the survey area with MagLog running prior to the start of actual survey In this case the GPS display is contaminated with a previous track that is not related to the actual survey Hide old GPS track hides all GPS position prior to the current time Show all GPS tack restores all GPS positions on the screen e Add plan elements Allows converting flags into survey plan elements and saving the survey plan in a file For instance two flags can be used to generate a set of parallel lines to be displayed as a background navigation map in the GPS window Note that user map survey plan has to be re loaded after new elements are added e Auto scroll When checked this keeps the GPS location in view and scrolls the window automatically In this way the GPS location is always visible e Zoom In Zooms in GPS window The same function can be accessed via the key on the computer s numeric keyboard on many laptops press function key to access numeric typically marked in blue on the keyboard e Zoom Out Zooms GPS window out The same function can be accessed via the key on the computer s numeric keyboard on many laptops press function key to access numeric
260. pped and line number is automatically incremented by one Note that if survey area is not defined or there is an error in defining the area logging may never start Make sure the survey area is visible on the screen as a shaded polygon It is highly recommended that the user ensure that logging actually started when the boat enters the survey area for the first time Always keep in mind the GPS to fish separation if GPS position is used as a reference for logging For instance 1f the boat leaves an area and logging is stopped the area may not be fully covered because magnetometer sensor is a considerable 160 distance behind the boat For this reason it is recommended to enlarge survey area by the cable length in all directions when using GPS as the reference point 13 Survey units MagLog supports meters or feet as the primary distance units The units can be easily changed at any time by selecting Configure Units menu item as it is shown below hid Maglog NT C MagLogData test survey File Configure view Output Devices Print Settings Window Help Input Devices Displays configuration Line Mumber Units For this survey Meters Comment elke we Feet Display Slots sca ee This will change all distance units in the current survey and can be implemented mid survey We of course do not recommend this action as it could be quite confusing For all dialog boxes where distance units are used the notation
261. problems in the setup of communications ports at this time If you are not getting good transmission from the magnetometer or GPS please detail all information about the setup and hardware configuration in an email to support geometrics com We will do our best to quickly troubleshoot your hardware difficulties b Data is scrolling up the screen but it is not recognizable Check the baud rate Often if you are using the correct communications port but the baud rate is incorrect you will get gibberish strange characters on the screen c MagLog cannot communicate with the magnetometer In some systems with long tow cables the PC serial port does not have enough power to propagate serial data from the computer to the magnetometer This results in an inability to interrogate and command the magnetometer There is a solution for magnetometers that have flash memory CM 221 counter connect the magnetometer to the computer using a short jumper cable configure it using CM201CFG program available on your desktop after MagLog is installed store configuration and then disconnect the magnetometer Then 37 change DO NOT CONFIGURE 880 1 in maglog ini file stored in the windows system directory This prevents MagLog from attempting to re configure the magnetometer each time a survey 1s started For additional information regarding switches in MagLog ini file see Setting options through Maglog ini After you are done press OK
262. r 88x 823 magnetometers MagLog sends commands down the line to configure the magnetometer This means that two 880 logical devices cannot share the same port inside MagLog because the program will attempt to communicate to both physical devices over the same transmit line and this is not allowed However two Generic Serial Devices can be assigned the same port in MagLog where a mixed data source string is being logged and each logical device assigned a separate display window and logged data file When the user sets up another serial device using the same port the following message appears 33 erial port is already taken Port COM is already taken by device MAL Append device to the serial port Don t ask this question again for this survey Here is MAG name of the device that is using this port already Note If there are no serial filters used see Configuring serial port parameters log files for each serial device sharing the same port hold the same information 5 3 Configuring the G 880 magnetometer In order to configure your magnetometer correctly you need to know 1 How many magnetometers you have 2 How many analog channels are required for each magnetometer In this manual we will refer to channels as analog to digital converted data transmissions such as the signal strength depth sensor and altimeter that your magnetometer outputs We also assume that every magnetometer outputs a magnetic field
263. r key to abort Y Saving At this point MagLog notifies the user that the calibration procedure is complete 60 5 11 Configuring G 822A Super Counter device MagLog is specifically designed to log data from Geometrics airborne G 822A Super Counter Go to Configure Input devices and select Mag 822A from the list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the next configuration dialog box will appear Alias Device Hame B22 Number of Sensors E Fort Settings l BCO format OK Cancel Alias device name Assign alias device name here Number of Sensors Total number of magnetic sensors Maximum number is 4 BCD format Check this box if the magnetometer counter is set up to output in BCD mode XS3 very high speed up to 100Hz sample rate In this case the program logs a hexadecimal dump of magnetometer output 5 12 Configuring EM61 device This feature provides a logging interface for the EM61 Note that this device needs to be triggered from the MagLog program by sending a command via the serial line Therefore it should have both Tx transmit and Rx receive lines wired in the interconnecting cable Note If you have multiple EM61 devices and you want to trigger them all at the same time you can use one Tx line from one serial port on the PC Connect this line to all Rx pins on all the EM61 s 1 e do not connect the other PC Tx wires from the other PC serial ports 61 Go to Confi
264. r plotting in Surfer or other graphics packages The above screen also has files used for annotation and document control 162 e Survey file training Survey This survey file saves all device configuration settings and slots traces settings e Log info file training Survey loginfol txt This file logs important events that happen while the program is running For instance if you have an 880 magnetometer configured it will record the settings used to initialize the G 880 magnetometer and it will state whether or not several of the operations involved in initializing the magnetometer succeeded This also records when a device is removed e Line number file training Survey LineNumber This file records the starting and stopping time of each line that you travel in your survey This file will only be when you select Start Logging and Stop Logging from the main File menu The Interpolator output file is discussed further in the Interpolator output section 16 Depth Analog channel calibration In order to get an accurate depth sensor reading the pressure transducer sensor must be calibrated This means that the depth sensor reading needs to be compared with a known depth to account for the variations occurring due to air pressure variations and to manufacturing variances Bias and linearity adjustment can be made in the program to empirically calibrate for depth You can read more about this method at
265. r point of the gradiometer array as a reference point Since the sensor is 20 meters from the tow point and it is the left sensor of a horizontal gradiometer we specify the distance as 20 m and the azimuth angle as 270 360 90 degrees Note If we were to use the GPS as a reference point we would use a distance of 22 meters 20m 2m antenna offset and an azimuth angle of 270 degrees The second sensor position is also specified Set parameters for mag 2 Type Shifted Distance m 20 Azimuth degree 30 rea Again the parameters are set with respect to the shifted point The distance is 20 meters and the azimuth angle is 90 degrees If the GPS were used as the reference point you would specify a distance of 18 20m 2m antenna offset and an azimuth angle of 90 degrees The final screen should look like the screen below interpolator params Fa Mags TRK UTM Positions Net Magnetometer s position Shifted 20 00 270 00 Shifted 20 00 90 00 Remove 194 5 Net Dialog network connection setup In this case this dialog box is not used because there are no serial or Ethernet output requirements Important MagLog will use the GYRO information in position calculations when it is available However you need to check the calculations box for those that require GYRO input because by default they are disabled e g for tow point calculations 17 5 2 ORE Trackpoint Il
266. r pre logged data file as actual survey data Always refer to the header on each of the slot windows for information as to the source of the displayed data to ensure that you are logging from the correct port during actual survey For data streams with multiple message types or for data streams where messages from different physical devices are combined MagLog allows simple message filtering based on a message prefix This may be required to allow part of the data stream to be logged while rejecting other parts of the stream For instance the GPS stream can typically have not only GPGGA messages but other types of GP messages as well To filter out all messages except GPGGA the user can use a prefix filter mechanism as3 described below 31 Serial filter prefix dialog box appears as Prefixes to filter EJ Attention Seral device will ignore or accept all strings which start with following prefires Policy Reject only bi GPVTG Prefix Add Remove Remove al T Do not apply filter to the logged data ATTENTION You must terminate survey and start it again to use a new filter Cancel To add prefixes type the new string into the Prefix field and press Add The string will be added to the prefix list for the particular device You can remove a filter string from the list by selecting it and pressing the Remove button or by pressing Remove All to clear the list Depending on the Policy settings MagLog
267. r that are needed to get a correct UTM transformation 176 These factors are also needed in the reverse transformation from UTM to geographical coordinates The rest of these options are needed only when Use Internal UTM is checked or when both Use Internal UTM and Geographical Coordinates are checked Ellipsoid Parameters These parameters allow you to choose a shape other than a sphere to use when approximating the earth This allows you to get better accuracy when doing a transformation from spherical latitude longitude to rectangular UTM coordinates These parameters must match those used by the GPS UTM Projection Parameters a Central meridian This value has a large impact on the UTM coordinates generated due to the non uniformity of an ellipse It can be quickly estimated as the value of the longitude but you should look it up below for a better calculation of your positions The Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Coordinate System uses zone codes instead of specific projection parameters The table that follows lists UTM zone codes as used by GCTPc Projection Transformation Package Zone C M Range Zone C M Range 01 177W 180W 174W 3l 003E 000E 006E 02 171W 174W 168W 32 009E 006E 012E 03 165W 168W 162W 33 015E 012E 018E 04 159W 162W 156W 34 021E 018E 024E 05 153W 156W 150W 35 027E 024E 030E 06 147W 150W 144W W 36 033E 030E 036E 07 141W 144W 138W 37 039E 036E 042E 08 135W 138W 132W
268. race with a scale factor of 1 and the second with a scale factor of 2 the second trace would appear to be one half the size of the first Linear combination formula This can be used to display values like gradients and total depth of the water column in marine surveys For gradient display the user has to determine the channel numbers for both magnetometers For example for a dual G 880 magnetometer system it might be and 4 Then linear combination formula for pseudo gradient will then be 4 1 If user wants to display the sea floor bottom topography for G 880 system with a depth sensor and an altimeter then the formula reads 0 001 3 0 01 4 Here 3 is the depth sensor channel number and 4 is the altimeter channel number 0 001 is the calibration coefficient for the depth sensor and 0 01 the coefficient for the altimeter These values will vary in each customer s system If depth and altimeter have non zero bias offset in their calibration formulas then the complete formula will look like this a 3 b 4 bias Where bias bias3 bias4 89 For the G 880 881 magnetometers depth altitude calibration coefficients can be assigned to the corresponding MagLog device Therefore there is no need to enter them in the trace configuration dialog In the case of the G 877 magnetometer the calibration coefficients are stored in the magnetometer internal memory However the Linear combination feature will still useful
269. rd number For ISA this should be zero For PCI this is the number used to distinguish between cards of the same type The first card is 1 the second card 1s 2 and so on e Card Segment For ISA In most cases this value should be 0 For the BOCA Dumb Multiport Port Cards the value should be ffff For the WCSC AST Compatible Four Port Multiport Card PCCOM4 or LCS 8880 the value should be 1bf or 2bf depending on whether the first port on the card is 1a0 or 2a0 respectively For the AST Four Port Multiport Cards the value should be flbf or f2bf depending on whether the first port on the card is 1a0 or 2a0 respectively For PCI Cards Index in the area of the PCI configuration space that contains the base address of the card It is a value between 0 and 5 e FIFO buffer depth in bytes 210 e Raw counter COMM DRYV driver reports time as a 4 byte value in microseconds This value wraps approximately once per hour It can be added to the device data stream if this field is set to Yes In most cases it should be set to No e Correction ms Value in milliseconds to be added to the time stamps This would allow real time correction for devices with known static latency Note that GPS latency can not be corrected this way because it is not constant To add new ports to the table press button Add To change settings of the existing port select this port in the first column of the table and press Edit The buttons
270. rea and release the button Slots will interchange their positions 6 2 Configuring the GPS Display The GPS display configuration is different from the magnetometer display configuration because it displays spatial position information not time series information To show any point on the Earth on paper or computer screen some kind of geographical projection must be employed To show GPS position the map and flags MagLog uses orthographic projection based on sphere with the central latitude and longitude in the middle of the screen This allows us to combine speed of calculation with reasonable accuracy To read Latitude and Longitude at the mouse location MagLog uses inverse orthographic projection This cancels distortions introduced by the projection calculation process 96 Display configuration Connected Input Devices COM 1320060 0 windows O Slots Configure GPS Display FINISH You can configure the GPS display by entering the Configure Configure displays menu and selecting GPS From here you can press Configure GPS Display to add a new window and configure the display At this point there is no window present for the GPS To remove display if there is one delete the GPS input device and then re configure it without enabling the display Use the Properties dialog box if you want to modify your GPS settings e g communications port number quality control values If you press the option Co
271. reviously generated Survey Files Since this is a new survey and there should be no previous surveys choose No Preconfigured Hardware 3 2 Continuing an Existing Survey If you don t wish to start a new survey you can continue an existing survey by selecting Continue Existing Survey from the menu above This will then allow you to load your current survey file Note Once you have specified a password on a survey file this will remain for the life of the file Remember your passwords for your surveys because you will be prompted for them each time you make configuration changes Passwords are not required but can assist in maintaining quality control 4 Configuring Input Devices and Displays with MagLog wizard To work with a particular hardware configuration MagLogLite or MagLog should be configured accordingly MagLog is a highly customizable program that allows a variety of different data presentations However flexibility always comes at the cost of complexity and therefore we have endeavored to minimize configuration difficulties by employing a MagLog Configuration Wizard It should be pointed out that the wizard covers only a limited number of hardware configurations many others are possible and that these include e GPS device sending NMEA XXGGA strings to one of PC s serial ports Here XX are any characters For example for GPS receiver sends GPGGA messages GP stands from GPS Later in this man
272. rform depth calibration as part of setup is unchecked by default Check it if you want to calibrate G 877 now After MagLog puts the G 877 into terminal mode it confirms desire to calibrate 54 If you answer Yes MagLog starts with item 1 from the list above The user can observe communication messages between the program and the G 877 on the screen As soon as steps 1 to 4 are complete MagLog launches the calibration dialog box 55 Of depth calibration ES Depth altimeter calibration Directions Put aray at a known depth and elevation above the ground Let sensors temperature stabilize it can take about 15 min in water Press Reset av Then enter known depth for calibration of the depth sensor or elevation for altimeter and press Reset ay and gt Add new calibration point Value 20 Reset ay Result of calibration Scale factor 0 008303 Bias 14 000000 Values for calibration Cane value 4095 00 Curent average 4095 00 Acceptable range iseto lapback calculation List of calibration points Reading Value Predicted 1696 15 0 00 0 00 4095 00 20 00 OK accept calibration Cancel discard results Please read the Directions section of the dialog box and follow the instructions Use the following procedure to calibrate the magnetometer Place the G 877 fish at depth 0 for instance on deck or floating at surface Ent
273. ribes the font used in the docking status bar By default it is set to 120 2 Info Dialog This is the dialog where you can fill in parameters such as your survey name You can disable this by setting it equal to 0 e g the line in Maglog ini should have Info Dialog 0 It will be enabled if this is set equal to one Password Protection This allows you to enable or disable password protection If it 1s disabled any surveys that were password protected before still will be protected However any future surveys will not be You can enable it by setting password protection equal to one and disable it by setting it equal to zero Demo This will change the appearance of the Port Parameters dialog box when you set up a new device 234 Demo 0 This does not allow you to use a sample file but you can specify a port from which to get data Demo 1 This allows you get data from a file only pure demo mode Demo 2 This allows you to use a sample file or get data from a port Warning Increment MagLog normally automatically increments the line number each time you stop logging This allows you to change that behavior Warning Increment I A dialog box will give you the option of incrementing each time you start logging Warning Increment 0 MagLog will automatically increment the line number when you start logging Exit Windows This will allow you to automatically exit Windows NT when you exit MagLog By default
274. rl h Continue Existing Survey Cbtri User flags 4dd plan elements E GRID 100f Recent File Start Logging Col 5 Stop Logging atri tE Start direct Printing Ctrl F Stop direct Printing Col Start Windows Printing Etrit Terminate Survey Etrit 2 lH a Exit Program E C 87 14 47 6025 S0 1L9 S5 35256 The dialog box Create or import map data allows you to specify the following geometrical features 104 Create or import map data e 2 2 x Sumve map elements Line Start 8 252670542 30 327655715 End 87 2502025226 30 329847125 H Line Start 67 252493601 30 327657313 End 57 2520007 30 3290457 23 H2 Line Start 57 2521 76660 30 327656910 End 57 252191 330 303296850520 3 Line Start 67 257659 719 30 327660506 End 57 251 874302 3032968571916 4 Line Start 67 251 942770 SO S2 662102 End 6 25155 454 30 329653512 5 Add user mark Remove element Add Arclnto T M shape file Edit element Remove all Save table Load table Clip region Don t clip map Morth 30 North East flags West 180 E ast South West flags South 30 Use buttons to get clip region using WagLog Flags Add survey area Magog map fle options Output file to be used by MagLog C MagLogData gps map Change Append data to the file Create MagLog map file e User marks These are simple scalable c
275. rocedure If you know the port and baud rate set it and press Autoset communication parameters MagLog scans all available ports and baud rates trying to find the magnetometer data It starts the search with the parameters you have set therefore if the port and baud rate are set correctly the magnetometer will be found very quickly Next set Hardware Type The following configurations are available k 1 G 88x 823 mag system This system consists of one magnetic sensor with its signal strength channel It outputs two numbers per reading total field and signal strength 1 G 88x 823 mag with depth sensor The same as above but with pressure transducer It outputs 3 numbers per reading total field signal and a depth reading that needs to be calibrated 1 G 88x 823 mag with depth amp altimeter The same as 2 but altimeter data has been added The system outputs 4 numbers total field signal depth and altitude Depth and altitude data both need to be calibrated see calibration section 2 G 88x 823 mag system Same as 1 but two magnetic sensors connected into a gradiometer chain Note See manual setup for configuration of multiple sensor arrays Now the system outputs 4 numbers Total field for first sensor its signal level total field for second sensor and its signal level 15 HM agnetometer s Setup Now vou should configure your magnetometers a They should be connected to the computer and running How This helps wou
276. rosses Press Add user mark button to enter latitude and longitude of the center point and span in meters of the cross To avoid typing latitude and longitude for the point press Add from flags button and select the appropriate flag The flag s position will be used as coordinates for the point Note that you can still edit this position if you need to in Add mark dialog or in User flags dialog Enter optional label text recommended for easy mark recognition on the screen default 1s just the flag s name Use this feature to mark known anomalies or other landmarks or hazards etc 105 User lines These are simple line segments that can be used to set up a survey line grid for the survey process Press Add user line and enter the end points longitude and latitude You can use Add from flags buttons to get end line positions as well To setup multiple parallel lines check Create multiple lines parallel to the base line box This will use the line you entered as a base line and will create additional lines parallel to the reference line at your desired lane spacing Enter the number of lines line interval and which side of the base line you wish to create the lines The choices are Right Leff and Both MagLog creates lines on either side of the base line looking from start point to end point If N additional lines are requested program creates N 1 lines for Right or Left options and N 1 line for
277. rtant data if survey line spacing is small To activate this feature select the GPS display window and select Configure On track plots The following dialog box will appear 110 GPS on track plots E4 Flot types C sakat aaa RMii Pitoed fo incite I Amplitude fii Owae M tiie Flot parameters Average window m f Ou Stack scale meters unit i Stack gravity azimuth fao L Gradient limit 2 Max Amlitude Data step to plot value 2 lo Distance to plot value po Value digits after dot 0 Userange for amplitude plat Min fo Mir Positive color BE Weave colon Hi All four possible On Track plots are listed under Plot Types Initially no data is selected for plotting To enable a particular plot type check its box and then click Modify to assemble the formula For example to use a real time magnetometer stack plot check Stack Plot and then click Modify The following dialog box will be displayed Modify display formula f Plot at GPS position Plot at fish potior Formula E Compose new term Device Imag Y Channel 1 Scale Add new term Mote Formula format scale device alas channel bias OF Cancel 111 There are two ways to enter the formula e Type it into the entry field The Formula must use the following syntax multiplier 1 device alias 1 device channel1 multiplier2 device alias2 device channel2 bias Multipliers
278. rveys At present the following devices are supported by one or the other of these drivers 67 e PPS pulse per second GPS device Some usually expensive GPS receivers can output 1 ms pulses synchronized with beginning of the UTC second PC time tagging of these pulses can be logged with MagLog PPS device At the same time GPS outputs UTC string which can be logged with MagLog Generic Serial Device Having logged both these data streams it is possible to recalculate PC time into UTC and vise versa for increased accuracy of timing and positioning e TTL Event Mark device is similar to PPS but has some additional features user can set pulse counter starting value and increment Often this is used as a shot counter in seismic type surveys where the shot point must be reference to the magnetometer reading e Trigger This device is based on Keithley CTM 10 CTM 05 A internal multifunction card that must be installed in the computer This device works as an internal pulse generator driven my MagLog It is used to trigger the G 822A Super Counter in high precision land and airborne MTADS type magnetic survey systems The device also allows the user to log the time of the trigger pulses with accuracy to about ms It is available under the NT platform only e Speedometer Also based on Keithley CTM 10 CTM 05 A multifunction card and uses internal hardware counters to count pulses without generating an IRQ to the CPU It is used to count whee
279. s to periodically send a line of data out an available serial Com port for onward transmission to the control center This may eliminate the need for a second person aboard the aircraft or land based survey craft often referred to as the operator This feature 1s available in MagLog only not in MagLogLite The option Status is available under Configure Output Devices Status It retrieves the dialog box where the user will specify the following 231 Configure status output M Enable status output via serial port Status output pernod ms 1000 Format ASCII 7 Serial Port coms Baud rate 19200 Ox00 0x00 0x00 0408 Binary Header 4bytes hesdecimall Status data to output MAG 1235 voll lt elt Add Delete Modify ren Status output period in ms The program will run a multimedia timer with this interval and acquire data from MagLog devices for transmission out an available serial port Format ASCII or binary In ASCII mode each device is represented by one string terminated with cartridge return In binary mode all devices are sent as one binary parcel see below Format is the same for all devices Com port and baud rate Other parameters are parity none 8 bit data 1 stop bit Binary header if binary output is to be used The header consists of 4 user specified bytes Bytes must be specified in hexadecimal notation as OXNN where NN are between 0 to F and
280. s can move in steps By default this step is 1 cm on the page This value can be changed in the page setup dialog min slot width cm When the right mouse button is pressed a small yellow tool tip window appears to show the mouse position in centimeters from the beginning of the page and beginning of the slot If the button is pressed out of the slot area then a text message No slot is displayed This information will be useful for putting textual data into appropriate places on the grid 9 3 4 Populating slots with data To add data to the slot move your mouse cursor somewhere is the slot area and right click to access the context menu Select Traces Alternatively you can just double click on the slot The following dialog box appears Data to draw Graphic tems Add Remove Edit Remove All Move to slot Duplictate ila Cancel 131 This dialog shows all graphic entities assigned to the slot Presently there are none The most important buttons are Add and Edit which allows adding information to the slot There are two types of plots currently available continuous waterfall graphs or Traces appropriate for magnetic field readings and numerical value plots appropriate for GPS positions and flags called Marks Dialog buttons perform the following functions Add Allows adding new graphic entity to the slot trace or marks Remove
281. s kind of plot has a fixed range with the positive axis pointing down in landscape mode or left in portrait mode 23 In the dialog box below the user can set ranges and scales for all the above slots as well as total a slot s duration in seconds speed of trace control Slot display parameters dM Duration 5 Use this dialog to set up slot display parameters for different devices ou can set total total duration in seconds and grid Interval along time asis for all slots There are two types of slots in Maglog with wrapped and timed scale Wrapped slot always shows the data when cure reaches one border tt appears from other side This Slots duration in seconds Eo Time grid interval li T Data Slot type Scale Min blas Grid M agnetic field Wrap E0 M A M A 25 Signal wrap fioo 500 i500 50 D epth altineter Fined fy ty 0 li OU li 0 al Back Hest gt Cancel 4 7 Configuring dot matrix or Printrex printers For other printer models see next section MagLog allows you to produce hardcopy output during data acquisition This option works with Printrex 8 or 11 5 thermal printers or with standard Epson type dot matrix 8 or 24 pin printers that are ESC P compatible Most dot matrix and some ink jet printers are compatible with these specifications however consult your printer manual regarding your specific printer Connect the printer to LPT1 or to the back of the so
282. s running NEVER do it when MagLog is running it will crash the system To change driver s parameters toy should use regedit exe program that is part of standard Windows distribution Be careful using this program and don t change values you don t know To start regedit exe go to Windows Start menu then Run and type regedit exe as it is Shown below Run Ei Ei Type the name of a program folder or document ard Windows will open it for you lM Bunin separate Menon Space Cancel Browse Then locate driver s entry They are located at HKEY LOCAL MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Services kei HKEY LOCAL MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Services wdj HKEY LOCAL MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Services wdj0 For example for wdj sys driver t Registry Editor Registry Edit View Help fl HEEY_CLASSES_ROOT H E HKEY _CURRENT_USER 28 Defaut value not set E E HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE ag DataPort 000000378 888 EL HARDWARE R ErrorContral Ox00000001 1 H SAM fs Inqlevel OxO0000007 7 SECURITY RH Start OXOOOOOO02 2 s2 o Ei Type Ox0O000001 1 Clone H E ControlSet001 H E Controls t003 _ Currentlontrols et zj m Control 245 Registry Editor esi Edit View Help lo gastar J VK H value not set H E WISE 000000378 888 H Wda 000000001 1 Bl OxO0000007 7 EE i 000000002 2 l E E num OxO0000001 1 a wdvgs i weitekpa i WinDriver
283. s section we show an example of the G 877 depth calibration process using the Windows HyperTerminal program This log corresponds to MagLog depth calibration described above Characters that are sent by MagLog or typed by the user if HyperTerminal is used are printed with bold font The fields that are being altered by MagLog or by the user are marked with an asterisk G877 Version 1 13 A Abandon changes B Baud rate C Cycle time D Display all parameters E Every thing F Format of output L cable and sensor M Mode of operation N Next multi systems R Run magnetometer S Save parameters f TUning gt F Preamble field display position 1 Ist 2 2nd etc 1 field display format HHHHH t HH t time display position O none 1 Ist 2 2nd etc 0 time display format fid display position O none 1 1st 2 2nd etc 0 fid display format HH signal display position O none Ist 2 2nd etc 2 signal display format depth display position O none 1 Ist 2 2nd etc 3 depth display format input voltage display position O none 1 Ist 2 2nd etc 0 input voltage display format temperature display position O none 1 Ist 2 2nd etc 0 temperature display format polarize voltage display position O none 1 I1st 2 2nd etc 0 polarize voltage display format tuning display position O none 1 1st 2 2nd etc 0 tuning display format Status display po
284. se values all distances are in meters and the central meridian in degrees lf your survey configuration i completely different trom these you will need to manually configure the interpolator Please see manual for further Back Hest gt Cancel Select the picture that best fits your actual geometry Enter the values of A B C D C1 and C2 on the next screen shown below Even if you have only one magnetic sensor MagLog always calculates two positions in this case simply ignore the second sensor position data On the next screen enter these values all distances are in meters or feet depending on units selected the central meridian is in degrees If your survey configuration is completely different from these you will need to manually configure the 20 Interpolator Please see the section on manual Interpolator configuration later in this manual On the previous screen you chose which mode longitudinal or transverse fits your actual geometry best The next screen presents the selected mode dialog box Layback parameters Your geometry Please enter your approsimate longtitude below interger degrees Cental meridian E 20 Offset parameters GPS winch distance A m li 0 Tow cable length B rn li n0 GPS starboard offset D m jo Note can be negative Second mag offset C m li O First mag offset C1 m 2 second mag offset C2 m 2 Back Hest gt Cancel N
285. se values for clarity Minimum vertical separation between labels This value controls how often data values are printed It is grayed out if Print all data below is selected Note that if you print longitude and latitude this value should be the same for both values for labels to align on the paper Print all data event mark mode In this case the program will print all data This makes sense only if sample rate for the device is low 10 seconds or greater Print time Time of the arrival is printed instead of data values if selected Marker format Select appropriate format For all devices except GPS or MagLog Interpolator the format is Decimals Next configure the latitude printout It is logical to print it on the same line as longitude Go to Data to draw dialog and select just created Lon entity and then press the Duplicate button A new entity named Lon appears in the list Select Lon and press the Edit button Presently Lon1 has the same parameters as Lon Some values have to be adjusted to turn Lon1 into latitude plot Do the following e Change marker name from Lon to Lat e Change device channel to Lat e Set marker type to no marker marker already plotted for longitude 138 e Increase Horizontal position to 25 mm Now the latitude is plotted on the same line as longitude using the same text size color and format
286. set only minimum limit is changed the same with maximum For example to plot altimeter readings it makes sense to set fixed scale range minimum value as 0 maximum value as 100 positive axis down and scaling method as maximum value Then originally slot will represent depth in range 0 100 m After you scale it with arrow key it may represent 0 200 m range or 0 50 m range depends on the scale direction Use Digital Display Only This option allows you to use the slot to output a numerical rather than a graphed value You can select either vertical or horizontal to show 86 whether you would like to output the values in a vertical column or a horizontal row when you want to display numerical values for two or more traces Digits after Dot This controls format of digital display You can also manipulate individual traces in the slot by using the following buttons Auto Add Trace This works similarly to the previous option Auto Add Slot In this case a trace is generated for every data value but all of them are confined to one slot In the case of the sample string 40001 24 0243 2001 1209 40291 35 0543 selecting this option would yield seven graphs all within the same slot See the below discussion of traces for further description on how to identify them The seventh trace corresponds to the gradient This gradient value is automatically calculated anytime there is more than one magnetometer Add Tra
287. sion protocol The echo sounder option is available in both full and light versions of MagLog software The device should be able to output via serial link a DBT message water depth referenced to the transducer in the following format SDDBT DATA_FEET f DATA METRES M DATA FATHOMS F hh lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Go to Configure Input devices in the MagLog toolbar menu and select Echo Sounder NMEA from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear NMEA Echo Sounder settings a x Alias Device Hame depth Cancel Port Settings Alias device name Assign alias device name here Port Settings Standard serial connection parameters dialog An echo sounder device has the following channels depth feet depth meters and depth fathoms By default it only accepts strings with the prefix SDDBT All other strings are rejected and are neither logged nor parsed If for some reason your echo sounder has different talker ID Note talker ID refers to the first two letter pair in the Prefix 1 e other than SD in the example prefix you can replace it by pressing Serial filter button in the Serial parameters dialog The following window will be displayed 66 Prefixes to filter E x Attention Seral device will ignore or accept all stings which start with Following pretes Policy Accept only Prefix Add Remov
288. sition O none 1 1st 2 2nd etc 0 Status display format Postamble N gt P Password VERADDA 58 signal scale factor 1 signal bias sign 0 ae 1 subtract 0 Signal bias Signal decimals y depth scale factor 1 depth bias sign 0 add l subtract 0 depth bias 0 depth decimals 0 input voltage scale factor i input voltage bias sign 0 add 1l1 subtract 0 input voltage bias O input voltage decimals 0 temperature scale factor 1 temperature bias sign 0 add l1 subtract 0 temperature bias O temperature decimals 0 polarize voltage scale factor 1 polarize voltage bias sign 0 add l subtract 0 polarize voltage bias O polarize voltage decimals 0 gt R Checking Running magnetometer software Setting Baud rate ZU LSI 84 A095 4095 AO LSA 36 4 20 9 5 AD 9S lt Here is magnetometer put at different depths gt Q QQEQQQQQQQQQOQQQQQQQQQQQQ QQEQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ QQEQQEQQOQQQQOQQQQQQQOQQQQQ G877 Version 1 13 A Abandon changes B Baud rate C Cycle time D Display all parameters E Every thing F Format of output L cable and sensor M Mode of operation N Next multi systems R Run magnetometer S Save parameters T Tuning gt P Password VERADDA Signal scale factor a 59 t Signal Diras ston lt 0 lt add J subtract 20 Signal bias O signal decimals 0 depth scale factor 83 depth bias sign 0
289. so a number that indicates the size in KB of data stored in the individual file for each device When you are logging this value will increment Data bar This is located below the menu and contains 16 black mini windows that indicate the last values of data received for the device corresponding to the current active window i e what the mouse has selected This is also useful to make sure that your data is being parsed correctly In the example of the sample magnetometer input string 40001 24 0243 2001 1209 40291 35 0543 there should be seven windows with numbers The first should correspond to 40001 24 the second to 0243 and so forth The seventh number is a gradient value that is only available for two or more magnetometers The slot and trace window This is where data will be plotted In the example above there are four independent windows Currently the window titled 8224A is the current selected active window indicated by blue title bar When a window is selected you can use some short cut keys to make some changes to the window Left Right Arrows These will modify the scale factor for the selected slot Up Down Arrows These will allow you to navigate through the window and select the slot For other operations please look at the Display Setting menu items The status bar This is located at the bottom of the screen and displays Latitude and Longitude of mouse pointer in mouse 1s inside GPS window It also disp
290. ss Slot Traces for Printer button Note In MagLog versions prior to 2 84 it was possible to configure devices and their displays in the same dialog However this was perceived to be confusing and it caused MagLog to re initialize devices even if only a minor display change was needed For clarity the program has been revised to separate these functions 5 1 Configuring serial port or TCP IP connection parameters One dialog box is used to configure both serial and TCP IP communication parameters All serial devices supported by MagLog have a common menu in their configuration of serial port parameters MagLog assumes that every serial connection has the following fixed parameters e 8 information bits e No parity e stop bit e No hardware flow control These parameters cannot be changed within MagLog and therefore devices must be configured in such a way as to meet these requirements 29 This is the serial and TCP IP parameters dialog box Communication Setup i x Type of data i Cerial part TCP 0 Data tile Serial TCP port setup Port Baud Aate 115200 Data file setup Data sampling rate ms 100 File name sample rate from file C Program Files Geometics eeu dat Serial filter Change port lt gt file next start Cancel It has the following parameters for each device individually e Data Source from serial port or data file Once a device is create
291. ssages 0 0 0 50 0 2E a A flee at el a 0 0 50 0 ER aM 4 001 62 142 0 0 50 0 2r ai Version 2 6 M Mode of operation C Cycle time T Tuning F Format af output Cancel Note that at this stage MagLog simply reads the device configuration but does not set the cycle rate and tuning value This occurs after you close Input Device Configuration dialog box and again this may take a minute it also happens every time when you change cycle rate and tuning for an already configured device MagLog displays a dialog box with the magnetometer messages as below 51 886 877 messages x Messages Cl 361965 35 12 0 44 6 2 U Cl 57140 91 a 0 0 44 6 27 0 C1 0 57512 61 1z 0 0 49 6 f U C10 56929 91 12 0 0 49 6 f U C10 of33 61 D 0 0 44 6 AF 97709 03 lz 0 0 49 6 AF 50044 55 D 0 0 49 6 A U Se e a 0 0 44 6 2 U ssbb eet ile 0 0 44 6 eat a Ul US sess ILO tay ile 0 0 49 6 2a Cancel Note The AutoTuning feature is not recommended 1f you know the field range Read below for additional explanation The G 877 magnetometer employs an AutoTuning function to automatically tune the magnetometer to the actual field value This can maximize signal to noise ratio when the field values are expected to vary as much as 3 000 nT or more over a short amount of time The situation where this might be encountered would be in high gradient areas associated with volcanic geology or in harbor areas where there are large gr
292. stamps 5 6 Configuring the ORE Trackpoint Il Sonar Tracking Device ORE Trackpoint II should be outputting EC 3 format to be compatible with MagLog Please see ORE manual how to configure Trackpoint II To ass ORE to MagLog survey select ORE Trackpoint and click on the ADD button You should see the screen below ORE Trackpoint settings Alias Device Mame OREI Cancel it Port Settings Here you can set the device name specified as ORE in this example and the communications port and baud rate through the Port Settings button After you have pressed OK you will then see the following display in the Input Devices dialog box 43 Input Devices Configuration Available Input Devices Connected Input Devices Mag G 858 850 mag COM1 19200Bd 1 Window 25 Slots Mag 88079817523 GPS GPS COM5 9600 Ed 0 Windows Mag 8244 GyroLlompass GAO COM4 SBODBd 0 Windows 0 Slots Generic Seral Device ORE ORE COM 96006d 0 windows 0 Slots GFS PPS pulse Speedometer Gyro Cable length Trigger FINISH Properties Remove This confirms and summarizes the hardware that has been configured 5 7 Configuring the GR 800 Gamma Ray Spectrometer airborne Select GR 800 and click on the ADD button The GR 800 Settings dialog box will appear on the screen GA800 Settings x Alias Device Name arso0 Cancel Number of predefined Accurnulators i 2 Fort Settings The Num
293. surveying The test need only be made only once for particular equipment set including PC EM61MII and GPS If any of these parts are replaced or new software installed a new latency test should be made 5 14 Configuring Gyro Compass device MagLog can handle data from NMEA compliant Gyrocompass device connected to one of RS 232 ports if your Gyro works with RS 422 use special wiring or RS422 to RS 232 converter The Gyro hardware should output strings with the format HEHDT 360 0 T 2 HEHDT 360 0 T 2 Here is HEHDT message prefix 360 0 is heading in degrees T indicates that this is true heading not magnetic and 2 after is a checksum If the Gyro outputs other strings they are ignored my MagLog Go to Configure Input devices and select GYRO from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog Press Add and this configuration dialog box will appear 63 Gyro compass settings Alas Device Name OF E eo Port Settings In this case there is only one field to be set the alias name 5 15 Configure Cable payout indicator Some marine systems can have devices that measure cable length automatically and transmit the results via a serial port ASCII strings Go to Configure Input devices and select Cable from list of available devices on the left side of the dialog box Press Add and the following configuration dialog box will appear Cable device settings x Alias Device Name
294. t The following transmission channels are available Serial port RS 232 communication TCP Point to Point connection Server mode Only one client at a time is allowed TCP Point to Point connection Client mode UDP connection to the desired host This mode could pass through a network gateway and broadcasting to a host on another network e UDP broadcast connection to any host on the local network The re transmission device transmitter can interleave data from different MagLog input devices into one data stream However there 1s no guarantee that data time stamps would be honored while sending data out For instance even if the data for device 1 arrived before data for device 2 it is possible that data for device 2 would precede data 1 in the transmitter data stream 144 To use this feature call up the Output Devices Re transmitters menu iid Maglog C MagLogData exu1 Survey File Configure View Output Devices Print Settings Window Video Titler Printer Interpolator Interpolator layback Fe Interpolator output Status Re transmitters The transmitters dialog is shown below Configure output transmission x Configured transmitters Properties Remove Remove all OK Cancel This dialog initially has a blank list of configured transmitters Press the Add button to create a new transmitter device To change the properties of the existing transm
295. t you can turn them on and customize the color and frequency of the grid lines by pressing Grid Lines The gridlines dialog box allows you to select time and data grid lines You can also specify the number of grid lines you want by adjusting the interval in seconds For instance using default settings in the Slot Configurations dialog box you would get 10 horizontal grid lines if you enabled them by checking the time box You can select the color you want by selecting Grid Color Fixed scale This allows user to set a fixed data scale for the When you press this button next dialog appears Fixed slot range M Use fixed range for a slot Min value 35000 Max value 35600 Positive axis left or down Scaling method Both OF Cancel To use wrapped scale suitable for magnetic field display uncheck Use fixed range for a slot All other fields in the dialog become grayed Press Ok To use fixed scale check this box and fill in other fields Min and Max values represents limits of the slot in data units If data is not in these limits nothing is plotted Positive axis left or down shows where maximum value is For example if you plot depth inside horizontal slot it makes sense to check this box Scaling method has next choices Both Min Value Max Value It defines how to scale fixed range slot with arrow keys It Both is set then scaling changes both limits of the slot When Min Value is
296. ta string were coming in e g you can log your data use the Interpolator if applicable and set up device displays 228 This feature is useful to learn the program and to replay data you have already taken although precise timing synchronization and thus positioning is not maintained See Playback Mode in Chapter14 above It is important that you do not enter this mode when you are actually performing a real survey Data and position information will look as though it 1s being acquired from outside sources when in fact it is not Clicking on Continue exisiting survey that is a demo survey can enter this mode Always look at your slot header information to make sure that you are logging from serial or TCP IP ports and not data files This feature is set up through the Device Configuration screen Our example will show how to set up a sample G 880 magnetometer file From your Input Device Configuration screen accessed through the Configuration menu add a G 880 magnetometer If you don t know how to do this refer to chapter 2 You should see the screen labeled G 880 Configuration and you will probably see an error message explaining that it cannot parse any incoming data streams Since you do not want to use any hardware press Cancel You will see a warning message similar to the message below Could not parse cm0 cfg ini Check sensorchannels in the next dialog Press OK to
297. tests test1 Surrey File configure wiew Output Devices Print Settings Window Help depth 60s 45 10 fix 55 000 grad 60s 1 276 0 776 00 5000000 5 x SLOTL 2008 76 3 77 3 iP ORE trk 180 0 Slant 50 0 12222 406164 37 50 105756 1 000 180 0 ooo 50 0 000 Ready 12222 457389 37 51 269034 Line 10 03 16 01 15 37 28 110 Mb Free on F Mem Free 78424 Kb 2 y GyroCompass com Note The screen above defines a system with a G 880 magnetometer GPS compass and ORE TrackPoint II positioning system The user also has enabled real time position interpolation and has prepared a vector map of the survey area for importation The screen that you see may be considerably different depending upon the exact display configuration you specify 156 This screen has many informative features that help the user understand the data logging process and maintain quality control Device Status Bar This is located on the top of the screen when you start the program The Status Bar is useful to quickly inform you of the data status The LED s come in three colors Green Data is being received Red No data has been received within five seconds Yellow Device dependent sign that something 1s wrong with the data In the case of the G 880 magnetometer and GPS this will turn yellow if one of the conditions for good quality data e g signal strength or data out of range is not met Below the LED there is al
298. therefore if you know or you think you know these com port parameters set them in the dialog box and press Auto set Communication Parameter to check if they are correct MagLog can generate a warning if the GPS signal deteriorates during survey To enable this feature you should check Differential GPS fix required and set the minimum number of satellites If one of these conditions is not met an Alarm Window with a 12 warning appears on the screen and a verbal alarm is voiced requires a sound card and speakers A note on real time layback calculations MagLog provides a feature that calculates where the sensor fish bird land system offsets is at all times It does this by noting the position of the GPS antenna and then taking input from you regarding the antenna position relative to the tow point on the back of the ship or other tow platform and the amount of cable deployed If you plan to use real time layback calculations you will need the central UTM meridian of your location If you are located at the same area where you plan to make a survey or at least in vicinity of few hundreds of kilometers and your GPS is getting real positions the Wizard will analyze the GPS messages find the corresponding central meridian and enter them automatically into the proper part of the program This makes it very easy to configure MagLog Interpolator as shown in the next few screens and why we recommend that you have a good GPS data transm
299. tibility Most copies of MagLog are designed with Printrex and ESC P dot matrix support If the Help About dialog box says nothing about printer type or says PRINTREX you have Printrex and dot matrix drivers 10 3 2 1 Configuring the GR33A printer Select Output Devices Printer from main menu You should see the following dialog box Chart Speed 0 001 2 mms 4 M Print GPs latitude amp longtitude P S latitude amp langttude Layback geographical Layback UTM 1 st ORE target geographical 1 st ORE target UTM At column L At least every CM Cancel This dialog box allows you to adjust the speed of the printer and how often the GPS data will be printed The options given are Chart Speed This is how fast the printer paper will go in mm per second Print Here you are given a list of possible positions you can print GPS latitude and longitude This will print the GPS coordinates in geographical coordinates Layback geographical This will print a calculated layback position in geographical latitude longitude coordinates Layback UTM This will print the calculated layback position in UTM coordinates 1 ORE target geographical This will print the position of the ORE target in geographical coordinates 151 1 ORE target UTM This will print the position of the ORE target in UTM coordinates At column 0 11 This specifies the column where the position will be printed At
300. tions are geographical coordinates and the GPS outputs latitude and longitude coordinates GPGGA messages A graphic describing this is 190 Cable length variable Sensor 2 Tow point Y offset 10m X offset 2m Sensor 1 20m 270 The Interpolator setup is as follows 1 Fill out the Mags screen 20m 90 19 Since we have a GYRO we are able to specify a tow point that will be recalculated Interpolator params E4 Mags TRK UTM Positions Net To Add remove interpolator device Array configuration Magnetometer aray offset m Tow point GPS offsets M Use position of tow point instead of GPS Caution Position of tow point can be calculated ONLY if gyro compass i available offset m positive to starboard 2 jig Y offset m positive to bow Here the magnetometer array offset is zero because there is a cable length measuring device Additionally since there is a GYRO the position of the tow point can be accurately calculated The offsets for the tow point must then be put in 2 10 taking into account that this is relative to the GPS antenna and that starboard is positive 2 Fill out the TRK screen This is not needed because there is no ORE Make sure that the option Use ORE Trackpoint IP is disabled 192 3 Fill out the UTM screen As shown below Interpolator params Mags TRE UTM Positions Net
301. tions to Possible Communications Setup Problems a No magnetometer data on the screen This could mean that you have set up an invalid communications port your magnetometer is not powered up or your magnetometer is not properly connected If you are not getting a message like the one described above Could not open COM11 you should check to see if your magnetometer is on If it is test the communications port by using another source of external data e g you could try a simulator that outputs RS232 serial data streams or you could hook up a GPS or Personal Digital Assistant to that port to check communications If you are unable to open the communications port make sure that you don t have any other devices using the same port To check right click on My Computer then left click on Properties left click on Device Manager and then scroll down to Ports Com amp LPT Expand this section by clicking on the box next to Ports and identify that the Com port you are setting up exists and that it is not conflicting with any other device IRQ conflict Also some listening programs such as Hyperterminal PDA Palm HotSync Modems or Fax software will keep the communications port busy until you exit the program check the Windows task bar at the far right for running programs If you still have trouble it sometimes helps to completely shut off the system and reboot This will reset all the computer hardware You must resolve any
302. to avoid having to manually set them up later ou may not kro which port is used press Autoset communication parameters to find out Then select the correct magnetometer type count your magnetometers one or two and set cycle rate After you press Mest MagLog will communicate with the Magnetometer serial port setup Port Baud Rate Auboset communication parameters Hardware type fi Boe oe mag gysten Cycle time 3 0 1 Back Next gt Cancel 5 2 G 88x 823 mag with depth sensors Identical to 2 but has two magnetic sensors connected into the concatenation chain Outputs 6 numbers total field for 1 sensor its signal depth and then repeated for the second sensor 6 2 G 88x 823 mag with depth amp altimeter Identical to 3 but has two magnetic sensors connected into the chain each with its own depth transducer and its own altimeter The system outputs 8 numbers that are total field signal depth altitude and then repeated for the second sensor Depth and attitude sensors have to be calibrated 7 G 877 886 Proton Magnetometer This device may have additional channels depth but they are normally factory pre configured Magnetometers need to be tuned for the region you are surveying 8 Pulse 12 1 coil system For Pulse 12 EM device with one coil Fish use this selection Please connect coil to the first slot 9 Pulse 12 2 coil system For Pulse 12 EM device with two c
303. tton is pressed MagLog updates its security files and exits with the following dialog L four user code ts BSBO 5B11 0400 Nig Please contact Geometrics with this code to obtain your REGISTRATION NUMBER Geometrics Inc 2190 Fortune Dr San Jose CA 95131 USA TEL 408 954 0522 F s 408 954 0902 e mail salest mall geometrica com Exit now please restart If you downloaded MagLog from the web or installed it from the Magnetometer CD for limited testing period please write down your user code from the above dialog and contact Geometrics customer service to obtain a temporary license code the User code can be obtained later by selecting Help Register menu After Ok button is pressed MagLog exits It is normal program behavior Please start MagLog again to proceed with your survey 2 1 Software registration MagLog is protected by the software or hardware key dongle The software is not fully functional if a dongle is not plugged into the parallel port or if software registration has not been completed In this case word lt UNREGISTERED gt is displayed in the main window title bar MagLog software may be downloaded from the web for a limited trial period and will be enabled free of charge Here is how to register your software after installation e Go to Help Register dialog Write down Your user code from the dialog below example Registration x ME veupreeperiie EIB L
304. twork card It should locate 3 Com Fast EtherLink XL Adapter 3C905 Press Next to continue 27 Select TCP IP Protocol and NetBEUI Protocol Select Next to continue You will be given the option to dynamically find a TCP IP address from a DHCP server Select No 27 You should next be prompted to enter an IP address If you know you have a TCP IP address to connect to an outward network enter it Otherwise any number should do for a local network For everything else take the defaults 28 You may be prompted to pick a proper Internet host name This is the name that your computer will be called over the network 29 The next option allows you to choose whether your computer is a member of a workgroup or domain Select WORKGROUP 30 Press Finish to complete your setup 31 The next option allows you to select your date and time and time zone You can make changes as needed or later from your control panel 32 The Display Properties dialog box allows you to select the type of display you have If you want to try a display with a higher resolution or more colors it is good practice to test your settings first This will allow you to fix it 1f you select incorrect settings 33 You should then see setup copy more files and save its configuration When prompted remove the Windows NT Workstation CD ROM and restart the computer YOUR INSTALLATION SHOULD NOW BE COMPLETE 241 22 2 Installation of Digi Adapter Optional 1 2
305. u are looking at paper coming out of the printer To enable this feature check this box From this screen traces can be added to the slots Refer to chapter five for more discussion on adding traces 10 3 Configuring Output Devices 10 3 1 Configuring the Video Titler Airborne Applications Select Output devices Video Titler from the menu Video Titler Printer Interpolator Interpolator layback Interpolator output Status change settings For video titler The following video titler configuration dialog box will appear Video Titler Port com Canoe If Video Titler ON OFF check box is checked then GPS line number and time information will be sent to the video titler and will be recorded on the VCR Otherwise no information will be sent The default port is COM1 for the video titler 150 10 3 2 Configuring Direct Printer Printrex and Dot Matrix printers MagLog can support either the RMS GR33 printer plotter OR the Printrex thermal printer and ECS P compatible 9 and 24 pin dot matrix printers Printer support 1s hardwired into the MagLog executable file To find out if your version MagLog supports GR33 or thermal and dot matrix printers go to MagLog Help About If the dialog box says GR33 it means that the GR33 printing device is supported and this program will not support either the Printrex or ESC P Epson dot matrix printers Very few MagLog versions were released with GR33 compa
306. ual the GPS string is also referred to as GPGGA e Geometrics magnetometers connected to a second serial port The models supported are o G 880 881 882 cesium vapor magnetometers with up to two magnetic sensors and optional pressure transducers and altimeters o G 886 G 877 marine magnetometer proton precession family o Pulse 12 EM JW Fisher o G 823A or B airborne systems same setup configuration as G 880 88 1 Other devices for logging and display may be configured manually see below It is possible to configure basic devices such as the GPS and magnetometer with the wizard and then append more devices manually at a later time 4 1 Starting MagLog Wizard To start the configuration wizard select Survey Wizard from file menu we ME File wiew Configure Output Devices Help Stark Mew Survey Ctrl h Continue Existing Survey Ctrl C Survey Wizard Create survey plan User Flags Play back survey 1 usb test Survey Start Logging Gtrl 5 Stop Logging trl E Terminate Survey Etri T Exit Program It is recommended that you have your hardware magnetometer and GPS connected to the computer and running at this time The GPS should be outputting real positions and the 10 magnetometer should also be running although it need not be producing real measurements for instance it can be lying on the ship s deck near large steel objects If these requirements are not met you still can proceed with t
307. um similar to NMEA messages if this box is checked Symbol is not included in checksum computation Output format Two options are available single string and multi string In the first case all fields selected for output are concatenated into a single string terminated by CR LF characters Checksum is computed only once for the whole string In the second case each field selected for output generates a separate string in the output each with its own checksum Output field separator Space tab sign or comma can separate output fields Output prefix Output string can start with user selected prefix Prefix may include spaces in fact the prefix should have its last character as a space to provide separation for the first field Output postfix String can be appended by user selected postfix Postfix appears before checksum Decimate data for output This option allows reduction transmission and file size reduction By default the Interpolator computes a position for each magnetometer string For instance if the magnetometer runs at 10 Hz the Interpolator computes 10 strings per second If the Decimate control is set to 1 then each of these strings is transmitted note that transmission speed is not uniform if GPS is running 663499 187 at different rate say 1Hz If Decimate is set to 10 only every 10 string is transmitted reducing output rate by factor of 10 e Save protocol file This option allows saving a
308. up Joe GPS PC running Windows JL 1 mks PPS pulse IRQ 7 0x378 generic serial driver generic serial driver Magnetometer counter JL Trigger pulse out CTM 10 05A card IRQ5 0x300 generic serial driver UTC serial string 0 5 ahead of PPS pulse Navigation serial message IZ OQOr OPZ magnetometer serial data j i Magnetic sensors on a The PC time stamps in the magnetometer log file are substituted with those from the trigger file thus providing a higher time accuracy lms vs about 20 ms Using 204 the relation between PC and UTC time the magnetometer times are recalculated into UTC time At this point all time stamps are expressed in the UTC time system and can be used for data locating directly Note Presently this system is available with G 822A Super Counters and under Windows NT only 18 2 The Modern solution Real Time Serial driver The legacy solution described in the previous chapter may not acceptable today because of a number of reasons e It requires additional hardware that has become obsolete e The trigger option is not available for marine magnetometers because of cable limitations e The PPS output option is uncommon and requires an expensive GPS receiver e Processing the data is complicated and cannot be performed with standard tools such as MagMap2000 e Only Windows NT systems are supported To provide a more generic solution to the timing problem th
309. used if you specify Geographical Output 17 2 4 GRAD Dialog If a Marine Transverse Gradiometer system is used MagLog can calculate the total horizontal gradient and plot it in real time The difference between the two magnetic sensors is used for the transverse part of the full gradient and data history is used for longitudinal part of the gradient yielding the full horizontal gradient This feature 1s controlled in the GRAD tab 178 Interpolator params E4 Mags TRK UTM GRAD Positions Net MOTE This option i available only for systems with two OF more magnetic sensors M Calculate full gradient Sensor 1 Sensor 2 E Sensor separation m fi Distance lag m fi OK Cancel All controls in this tab are disabled if a transverse gradient system is not available The following values must be entered e Calculate full gradient check to enable the feature e Sensor I and 2 Enter sensors numbers for first and second sensor They are typically 1 and 2 but for multi sensor system they may differ For example if there are 4 sensor arrays and sensors 2 and 4 are used as parts of a transverse gradiometer enter the numbers 2 and 4 e Sensor separation Enter the sensor separation distance in meters e Distance lag m Enter the distance to calculate the longitudinal part of the gradient Typically this should be the same order of magnitude as the separation between s
310. used to configure and permanently store configurations in the 880 882 magnetometer family running CM221 counter boards this coves most of the marine magnetometers except 877 The typical usage is for configuring a magnetometer using a short jumper cable instead of the actual tow cable and then storing the configuration for later use Here is an example e The user has 5 marine magnetometers that originally were intended to work in separate projects However the customer now wants to build magnetometer array It can be the case that the power up defaults for the magnetometers are such that they will not work together when connected into one array e To resolve the problem the customer can connect each magnetometer sequentially to the computer running CM201CFG program Using the program each magnetometer can be reconfigured for instance default baud rate is set to 19200 instead of 9600 and configuration is stored using the Store configuration button e Now when all 5 magnetometers are re connected together the system has enough bandwidth to concatenate them together into one data stream Another example would be if the transmit to sensor wire in the tow cable were absent This would make it impossible for MagLog to configure the magnetometer because commands cannot propagate from the PC to the sensor This can be resolved with the following procedure 231 e Connect magnetometer to the computer using short jumper cable with all w
311. ver if the BNA file format is used you cannot employ the MagLog survey area polygon feature Some data for the US and other parts of the world are available at no charge at www esri com 109 6 5 Using Ontrack Plots MagLog allows plotting information from other devices typically magnetometers as an overlay of the GPS plot for easy display Data from different sources can be combined into single values to be displayed in the following ways e Real time stack profile e Real time longitudinal gradient plot If the gradient along the line exceeds some user defined value colored triangles are plotted on the track Triangles are scaled to the distance between adjacent GPS positions e Real time amplitude plot If either the relative or absolute amplitude exceeds certain limits colored circles are plotted on the track plot These circles are not scaled if the scale of the map changes e Real time value plot Readings or combination of readings from different devices can be plotted on GPS map equidistantly or when the difference from a previously plotted value exceeds some limit For example total depth for Systems with altimeter and depth sensors can be plotted each 100 m or for a change of more then 2 meters Another application of this feature is plotting of Event Marks on the GPS map 749714 3 749620 6 750926 3 49736 0 PRECAUTION Use caution when activating these features as the data could obscure impo
312. ways One way is a simple time graph trace which can wrap to the bottom of the chart when value goes out of range The magnetic field depth and signal are usually plotted using this type of presentation However for the depth plot a fixed range no wrap is preferred Data also can be plotted numerically marks In this example the user chose to plot the GPS position each 2 cm on slot 1 graph These two types of plots are interchangeable which means that the magnetic field or depth can be plotted as a number each cm as well as represented as an analog trace In fact any MagLog data can be presented as traces or marks 124 Start and stop times of the page was logging ON or OFF when page was printed line number MagLog version and compilation date i Survey file name Mark type plot usg for GPS pgsitions and eyents field value is plotted when graph wraps data plot area Start page 10 38 57 260 05 06 03 Current page number Stop page 10 43 57 260 05 06 03 Line 3 45m d e p th all L aA t sep 29s MagLog 2 80 NT PRINTREX 02 27 2003 4920r AG o LON sep 29s Flag 1333 33 S 1gn al 49 23nT mag 1 O Legend area Ssurvey F data datal t oy A awT wT oUrvey oe SOTA SUT TSF MNA a 87 14 9519620 30 19 6484860 d L gt B14951530 40 19 6831 840 N 87 14 9494860 40 19 7106830
313. will accept or reject strings with prefixes in the list If the policy is set to Reject only then all strings with the listed prefixes are rejected If the policy 1s Accept only then only strings identified in the list are accepted the rest are rejected This latter condition may be useful when some string formats are unknown Important Note A Serial filter can be applied to MagLog displays without being applied to the recorded data If Do not apply filter to the logged data is checked then MagLog uses filters inside the program to filter serial data for display purposes but all data transmissions from the serial device are logged If this box is not checked the filter is applied to the logged data also which then reduces the amount of logged information and the data file size For example a Gyrocompass outputs two messages HEHDT 183 1 T 24 06 22 01 10 22 55 737 HEROT 13 5 A 1C 06 22 01 10 22 55 754 The first message HEHDT reports true ship heading and is used by MagLog To accept this message add HEHDT in the list and select the Accept only policy If Do not 32 apply filter to the logged data box is not checked then only HEHDT messages are logged However if box is checked both HEHDT and HEROT messages are logged Now if there is a HEHDT prefix in the list and the Reject only policy is selected MagLog filters out all data strings and therefore the gyro compass light stays red If at the same time
314. with the magnetometer configure the data transmission format and cycle rate accordingly If the magnetometer is not connected the program will fail to converse with the mag and you must press the Cancel button After canceling you can still proceed to the next dialog box but in general we recommend that you use the Wizard only when all devices to be logged are connected and sending data to minimize possible mislabeling of input devices The communication program may fail for other reasons as well such as a wrong number of magnetic sensors entered into the dialog box for example if your system has only one sensor and you are trying to configure it as a 2 sensor system The solution is to simply go back to the start and set up a new survey with the proper configuration information 17 4 4 Magnetometer calibration 880 881 883 Depth altimiter calibration Depth sensors and altimeters require calibration coefficients real dapin 2 Cale x You may enter factor values here see user manual or if you depth reading Olas going to calibrate them by yourself just check Do not enter calibration coefficients now and go to the nest screen Please consult your manual about calibration procedures Do not enter calibration coefficients now Depth Magnetometer 1 Scale o 047583 Elaz 34 BY M Use depth for layback Altimiter Magnetometer 1 Scale fi Bias lo Depth Magnetometer 2 Scale 0 1 Bias 50
315. x will appear Alias Device Name a858 Humber of Sensors 2 Port Settings gt BED format OF Cancel Alias device name Assign alias device name here Number of Sensors G 858 magnetometer can have one or two sensors connected BCD format Always disabled for this device 5 17 Configuring PULSE 12 EM device JW Fisher s Pulse 12 EM device may include up to 3 coils connected to three hardware ports Regardless of the real number of coils available the device always outputs voltage for these three slots 1f there is no coil present it will just output a constant value Therefore if the user has just only one coil and accidentally connects it to slot 3 he should treat the device as a 3 coil system and neglect data for coils 1 and 2 Next following dialog box appears to configure the Pulse 12 device Pulse 12 EM settings x Alias Device Mame Number of coils 3 coil system Port Settings Cancel OF As usual user has to assign the alias name Port settings are standard for any MagLog serial device Note It is necessary to eliminate the coordinate strings in the Pulse 12 data string starting with symbol MagLog automatically sets the filter reject prefix as to remove those strings which are therefore not recorded 65 5 18 Configure Echo Sounder device MagLog software provides a simple interface to marine echo sounder devices compatible with the NMEA standard transmis
316. y All slots Fon Slot MAG Ge nnmn In e Move mouse to the location where flag should be set e Click and hold right mouse button to display context menu Select appropriate flag type GPS or FISH Note that FISH is not available if the Interpolator is not running e Release mouse button to set a flag e Flag is shown on all device slots and on the GPS display e Ifyou want to remove previous flag s go to List flags 8 2 Adding flags from GPS Display Here is how flags can be set on the GPS display 120 Move the mouse cursor to the location where a flag should be set You can see the latitude and longitude of the mouse position on the bottom status bar Right Click mouse and hold it A context menu appears Select Set GPS Flag and release mouse button Flag appears on the GPS display You can call the general flag dialog box by selecting List flags option Figure below illustrates this procedure Set MAP Flag List flags Display 8 3 Adding Flags using hot keys There are two hot keys that allow you to add flags instantly at the time when the key is pressed Both keys are enabled only if a GPS or magnetometer display is created Key F11 adds flag at current GPS location When this key is pressed the program takes the latest available GPS reading and creates a flag based on its time and position The user is prompted for a flag name If no flag name is assigned then default flag name is used Key
317. y as well Trigger string Type trigger string as it is required by the device see device manual for details 3DM GX1 requires two character trigger Type hexadecimal codes do not use prefix Ox or x You must type 4 characters In this case these are 0E00 Trigger termination character decimal Leave it black Trigger sample interval ms This sets time interval for triggers Max allowed number of missing triggers This controls how device handles disconnection If there are more triggers issued than data received device flashes its data and triggers buffers and starts over Trigger syne mode To prevent jamming the device you could require that no trigger could be issued if PC in the reception of the data from the device This only could be a case if high sample rate is used 3DM GX has internal buffer to accommodate up to 16 commands so you don t need to use sync mode 77 Data string length This is crucial here Wrong length will not allow MagLog to receive and parse data Enter 11 as it appeared from the table above Data termination character Not applicable for binary devices Max number of fields to parse Not applicable for binary devices Use Binary parser instead Load and Save buttons Saves entire device configuration including parsing table Does not save however port and baud rate You need this file to use in different survey as well as to convert into ASCII representation using MagMap2000

MagLog User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents